Home

Fujitsu P3PC-3792-02ENZ0 Photo Scanner User Manual

1. BULIM 978 24 0 1ajoy YO suoyeiounuue Bullemod Jo ajqeuns papu 198mOgy pasinadng ns wueje ou ym Jamod OY uo S pauinba uoisyuadng wnuixew doo7 9718 p Ipu09 jewou uj MOYS SJOBJUOy 9 sdwe g payuu 1emod pasayuy eansisa1 OVA 0 due g o IQA pz Z emo AQEYO SAUON WOOJ WES UUM eaysisai OGAOE O sdwe Oz o ALLA wnwxew 300 09 AMIA s6uney joeju0D NE NY L 4704 ejes pejumog peojdn dov4 pasinsednsuou Z OYN L OVN uolsiAsadns _ e uM asinadns yum Jajnduwos euosad JO Ke19N aiqnoiy PIXI S INDJIID PASIAJOUNSUOU Pa IWll JOMOd juauidinbe pajsil 403 104 99 s Pai elubo z puzog Jo abpa bu eeu 90A pz s nd no JamMod 90A POJLUI 19MO y pejensni A 9119 99S J MOd uopeoddy oada pied AJMOYN Buisn iii Jayndwios jeuosied y SSejo 10 painByuoo gar 10 JajuLid 0 Z Z Vl3 nouo Jad xew sdwe o g y ssel0 Z ands Z 8 L OWN S INOIIO p s m dns p pwulj I MOd suo12 uuo wuajs s 9 seg 198mo4 voneo ddy ernads Syno souelddy UOIE91J ION MS 9600LS Series Manual P N 52646 B2 2 12 2010 10 Peripheral Devices and Their Documents Audio Control for ACC 25 50 ZS T Audio Command Center Doc 51889 f ae e ANN R LED TENE ANN 80 fig de LED Display ANN S PG Text Annunciator ANN RLY Renee r Doc 53032 ria Oai Doc 52749 Form C Relay Card i Doc 151417
2. NAC 4 3 amps max SL Style Y only per circuit MR S Standb j gt 1 5 Amps Max a per panel P So o So Alarm _ 7 Amps Max SN per panel a powerdist9600ls2 wmf The combined output current of all Special Applications Power circuits cannot exceed 1 5 amps in standby Each circuit is capable of delivering the full 1 5 amps individually Refer to the battery calculations section for additional information Figure 1 1 Current Availability 1 4 Controls and Indicators LCD Display The FACP uses an 80 character 4 lines X 20 characters high viewing angle LCD display The display includes a long life LED backlight SYSTEM ALL NORMAL that remains illuminated If AC power is lost and 10 00A 020102 the system is not in alarm the LED backlight will turn off to conserve batteries LED Indicators HONEYWELL LIFE SAFETY LED indicators are provided to annunciate the following conditions AC Power green Fire Alarm red Supervisory yellow Trouble yellow MS 9600LS Series Manual P N 52646 B2 2 12 2010 Product Description Circuits e Maintenance presignal yellow e Alarm Silenced signals yellow e Disabled yellow e Battery fault yellow e Ground fault yellow Key Panel Mounted on the main circuit board the key panel includes a window for the LCD display and LED indicators as listed above The key panel which is visible with the cabinet door closed has 25 keys
3. ccocccoccennrennrennrnnncnnnnnnnennncnnnnnnrnnnr enn 200 PL E E E E A E A E E A 201 8 MS 9600LS Series Manual P N 52646 B2 2 12 2010 It is imperative that the installer understand the requirements of the Authority Having Jurisdiction AHJ and be familiar with the standards set forth by the following regulatory agencies e Underwriters Laboratories Standards e NFPA 72 National Fire Alarm Code e CAN ULC S527 99 Standard for Control Units for Fire Alarm Systems Before proceeding the installer should be familiar with the following documents NFPA Standards y NFPA 72 National Fire Alarm Code NFPA 70 National Electrical Code nderwriters Laboratories Documents L 38 Manually Actuated Signaling Boxes L 217 Smoke Detectors Single and Multiple Station L 228 Door Closers Holders for Fire Protective Signaling Systems L 268 Smoke Detectors for Fire Protective Signaling Systems L 268A Smoke Detectors for Duct Applications L 346 Waterflow Indicators for Fire Protective Signaling Systems L 464 Audible Signaling Appliances L 521 Heat Detectors for Fire Protective Signaling Systems NSI UL 864 Control Units and Accessories for Fire Alarm Systems L 1481 Power Supplies for Fire Protective Signaling Systems L 1610 Central Station Burglar Alarm Units L 1638 Visual Signaling Appliances L 1971 Signaling Devices for Hearing Impaired L 2017 General Purpose Signaling Devices and System UL CAN ULC S524 01 Standard for Installation
4. iS OO F CONTROL CARD RSC CIRCUIT SIDE REMOTE STATION MASTER BOARD RSM 9 ll TE CARD p PSI iT SIDE OPTIONAL ZONE CARO RSZ CIRCUIT SIDE E A OPTIONAL ZONE CARD RSZ CIRCUIT SIDE a ACOPTIONAL ZONE CARO RSZ CIRCUIT SIDE OPTIONAL ZONE CARD ai CIRCUIT SIDE E FC OPTIONAL ZONE CARD RSZ CIRCUIT Qsive Polarity Shown is Normal Standby Da 7 ALARM SIGNAL INPUT 8 ALARM SIGNAL INPUT 9 SSS A OPTIONAL ZONE CARD RSZ CIRCUIT SIDE OU Pe a RECOMMENDED TYPES El o POWER TRANSFORMER YUASA NPG 12 OR EQUIVALENT MAXIMUM BATTERY SIZE 4 gt CuI Power limited SIS e B 5 POWER LIMITE 1 Dummy load with a 4 7KQ watt resistor when no connection is made L e o B Cutting TBL Jumper allows the reverse polarity circuit to open with a system trouble condition if no alarm condition exists 4XTMF Transmitter Module 3 TBL ba e m no e gt E E O Figure C 4 Remote Station Connection Using 4XTMF Module MS 9600LS Series Manual P N 52646 B2 2 12 2010 191 NFPA Standard Specific Requirements NFPA 72 Proprietary Protective Signaling Systems FACP Addressable Fire Control Panel FACP Main Board Form C Alarm contac
5. Noun Adjective Screen ttttttttttttttt t 1 HORTH 2 SQ0UTH S EAST Adjective Screen 1 Be a a te ei a ee ee 1 REAR 2 UPPER S LOWER Adjective Screen 3 SESE EEE EE EEE EEE ET 1 3RD 2 4TH S 3TH Adjective Screen 5 See Ett 1 FLOOR 4 2 FLOOR 5 35 RO0M Adjective Screen 7 MS 9600LS Series Manual P N 52646 B2 2 12 2010 the monitor module currently being programmed See ee eS 1 WEST 2 FRONT S CENTER Adjective Screen 2 SEE EEE EE EEE 1 MAIN 2 FIRST 3 2HD Adjective Screen 4 ee EEE EEE 1 FLOOR 1 2 FLOOR 2 S FLOOR 3 Adjective Screen 6 85 Programming Master Programming Level T STANDARD ADJECTIVE Pressing 2 while viewing the Noun Adjective Screen will cause the following screen s to be dis 2 STANDARD NOUN played Note that the keyboard down arrow key must be pressed to see all the Noun screens Press CUE TON Moa SE the number corresponding to the noun that is to be used as a descriptor for the location of the mon itor module currently being programmed Noun Adjective Screen SSE EEE EEE EEE EE Et 1 CLOSET SPE EEE EEE tt 1 BASEMENT 2 BOILER RM S CLASSROOM 2 CORRIDOR S ELECTRIC RM Noun Screen 1 Noun Screen 2 Se Et 1 GARAGE 2 HALLWAY S HVAC RM SEE EEE EEE EE tt 1 ELEWATOR 2 ENTRANCE 5 FLOOR Noun Screen 3 Noun Screen 4 ee a See tt 1 KITCHEH 1 PATIEHT 2 LOBBY 2 RESTROOM 3 0F FICE 3 RO0M
6. grammed to Initiating Devices as well as other circuits with no input or output correlations Pressing 3 while viewing Programming Screen 4 will cause the following screen to be displayed Programming Screen 4 PROGRAM CHECK i HACS HO INPUT 2 Z0WES HO INPUT 3 ZDHES HO OUTPUT ieee ae E Pressing while viewing the Program Check screen will display an NAC screen similar to the fol 2 Z0NES HO INPUT lowing 3 Z0MES HO OUTPUT Program Check Screen HACS NO INPUT HAC 1 20 31 44 55 67 The example above indicates that NAC 1 has been programmed to Zones 25 31 44 55 and 67 but no input devices have been programmed to any of these zones Use the up and down arrow keys to view all the NAC zones without input assignments for NAC 1 NAC 2 NAC 3 and NAC 4 NOTE If the NACs have been configured for Class Ain the setup option only NAC1 and NAC2 will display test information NAC3 and NAC4 will display asterisks and will not be included in the test Pressing 2 while viewing the Program Check screen will display a screen similar to the following OHES HO INPUT 65 67 69 16 11 1M661 The Zone No Input screen allows the programmer to view the zones which have not been pro grammed to at least one input device not including general alarm Zone 00 The example in the preceding screen indicates that Zones 05 07 09 10 and 11 have been programmed to an address able module control module in this example with a
7. MS 9600LS Series Manual P N 52646 B2 2 12 2010 155 Operating Instructions Medical Alert Condition Operation 4 9 Medical Alert Condition Operation Medical Alert Condition operation will initiate the following events e The piezo sounder turns on steady e The LCD displays a medical alert message along with the device name type address adjective noun associated zones and time date e Relays programmed for medical alert will be activated The alarm relay is not activated e Silenced alarms are not resounded e Timers are not started e Store event in history buffer e Medical Alert condition must be Acknowledged before the FACP can be reset Medical alert conditions latch and will therefore clear only when the medical alert condition is cleared and the panel reset They can be assigned to software zones 4 10 Programmed Zone Operation Each addressable detector and monitor module can be assigned to a maximum of five software alarm zones A general alarm zone Z00 may be listed for output control points but it is not nec essary to list Z00 for input points since this is the default zone for all alarm input devices Zone Z00 is also activated by supervisory points When an input device alarms and is not disabled it activates all software zones assigned to it An output device that is not disabled is turned on when any of the software zones to which it is pro grammed become active 4 11 Disable Enable Operation Inp
8. Recommended Max Circuit Type Circuit Function Wire Type and Limitations Distance Wire Gauge and Compatible Brands Feet meters Connects to Twisted shielded pair 10 000 3 000 m 12 AWG 3 25 mm Genesis 4410 Addressable Devices 40 ohms maximum per length Signal 98230 Belden 9583 WPW999 of Style 6 and 7 loops 40 ohms 8 000 2 400 m 14 AWG 2 00 mm Genesis 4408 amp 4608 per branch maximum for Style 4 Signal 98430 Belden 9581 WPW995 CLIP MODE loops 4 875 1 450 m 16 AWG 1 30 mm Genesis 4406 8 4606 Signal 98630 Belden 9575 WPW991 Direct Burial Cable Isotec NP713110VNQ S 3 225 980 m 18 AWG 0 75 mm Genesis 4402 amp 4602 Signal 98300 Belden 9574 WPW975 SLC loop Direct Burial Cable Isotec NP714110VNQ S power limited LITESPEED MODE Twisted unshielded pair 40 ohms maximum per length of Style 6 and 7 loops 40 ohms per branch maximum for Style 4 loops 10 000 3 000 m 8 000 2 400 m 4 875 1 450 m 3 225 980 m 12 AWG 3 25 mm Belden 5020UL 8 6020UL Genesis WG 4315 8 WG 4515 14 AWG 2 00 mm Belden 5120UL 8 6120UL Genesis WG 4313 8 WG 4513 16 AWG 1 30 mm Belden 5220UL amp 6220UL Genesis WG 4311 amp WG 4511 18 AWG 0 75 mm Belden 5320UL amp 6320UL Genesis WG 4306 amp WG 4506 Untwisted unshielded pair 3 000 900 m 12 18 AWG 3 25 0 75 mm using listed wire ACS BUS Connects to Twisted pair with characteristic 6 000 1 800 m 12 AW
9. The most common cause of fire alarm malfunction is inade quate maintenance To keep the entire fire alarm system in excellent working order ongoing maintenance is required per the manufacturer s recommendations and UL and NFPA stan dards At a minimum the requirements of NFPA 72 shall be followed Environments with large amounts of dust dirt or high air velocity require more frequent maintenance A main tenance agreement should be arranged through the local man ufacturer s representative Maintenance should be scheduled monthly or as required by National and or local fire codes and should be performed by authorized professional fire alarm installers only Adequate written records of all inspections should be kept Limit C1 2 2007 MS 9600LS Series Manual P N 52646 B2 2 12 2010 Installation Precautions Adherence to the following will aid in problem free installation with long term reliability WARNING Several different sources of power can be connected to the fire alarm control panel Disconnect all sources of power before servicing Control unit and associ ated equipment may be damaged by removing and or insert ing cards modules or interconnecting cables while the unit is energized Do not attempt to install service or operate this unit until manuals are read and understood CAUTION System Re acceptance Test after Software Changes To ensure proper system operation this product must be tested in accordance with
10. FACP ANN BUS ACS BUS 6 pe a 9600Istoann80 cdr Figure 1 6 ANN 80 Wiring to FACP MS 9600LS Series Manual P N 52646 B2 2 12 2010 29 Product Description Accessories 30 The following table shows the ANN 80 connections to the FACP FACP ANN 80 TB1 Terminal GND on TB3 Terminal 1 Terminal PWR TB3 Terminal 2 Terminal ACS on TB6 Terminal 3 A Terminal ACS on TB6 Terminal 4 B Programming Following installation and wiring of the ANN 80 LCD annunciator to the FACP the annunciator must added to the system via FACP programming Refer to the programming section titled ANN BUS Options on page 121 in this manual for detailed programming information Select the LCD option for programming Trouble Response If the ANN 80 is installed but the ANN BUS is not enabled at the FACP the ANN 80 will indicate a trouble condition by NOT turning on its AC Power indicator The LCD will also display Key Bus Trouble and the piezo will sound approximately once every 10 seconds Note that the FACP will provide no indication of an ANN 80 trouble To clear the ANN 80 trouble condition enable the ANN BUS and program the address correspond ing to the address set on the ANN 80 at the FACP If the Keyswitch on the ANN 80 is left in the unlocked position for more than 2 minutes a trouble condition will be indicated at the FACP ANN S PG Serial Parallel Interface Installa
11. Fire LITe ALarms by Honeywell Addressable Fire Alarm Control Panel NvS S9GOOLS MS SGOOLSE VviS S9GOOUDLS MS SGOOUDLSE MS 9GOOLSC Manual Document 52646 2 12 2010 rev B 2 P N 52646 B2 ECN 10 098 Fire Alarm System Limitations While a fire alarm system may lower insurance rates it is not a substitute for fire insurance An automatic fire alarm system typically made up of smoke detectors heat detectors manual pull stations audible warning devices and a fire alarm control panel with remote notification capability can provide early warning of a develop ing fire Such a system however does not assure protection against property damage or loss of life resulting from a fire The Manufacturer recommends that smoke and or heat detec tors be located throughout a protected premise following the recommendations of the National Fire Protection Association Standard 72 NFPA 72 manufacturer s recommendations State and local codes and the recommendations contained in the Guides for Proper Use of System Smoke Detectors which are made available at no charge to all installing dealers These documents can be found at http www systemsen sor com html applicat html A study by the Federal Emer gency Management Agency an agency of the United States government indicated that smoke detectors may not go off in as many as 35 of all fires While fire alarm systems are designed to provide early warning against fire they do not
12. P N 52646 B2 2 12 2010 199 200 Appendix G Canadian Application The MS 9600LSC is supplied with the DP 9692 Dress Panel When installing and programming the FACP the Canadian Option must be set to ON prior to any other panel programming refer to Canadian Option on page 113 of the Programming Section of this manual ACS Series annunciators are not compatible for Canadian applications The LCD 80FC annunciator can be used for optional ancillary annunciation The ANN LED annunciator must be installed in the same room as the FACP All wiring between the FACP and ANN LED must be in metal conduit no longer than 20 feet The installer must write in the Date of Final Assembly on the Master Marking and Warranty Label located on the FACP backbox door To comply with CAN ULC S559 04 the DACT UD2 and 4XTMF must both be utilized ANN LED annunciator must bein same room as FACP metal conduit max 20 ft Roar ANN LED Annunciator FACP Figure G 1 FACP Minimum Configuration Single ANN LED Annunciator metal conduit max 20 ft ANN LED annunciators must be in same room as FACP E FACP ANN LED Annunciators Figure G 2 FACP Maximum Configuration Eight ANN LED Annunciators MS 9600LS Series Manual P N 52646 B2 2 12 2010 Index Numerics 300 Series addressable devices 20 4XTMF module 190 191 coil
13. 39 40 49 50 59 60 69 70 79 80 89 and 90 99 will follow the same pattern as the second ANN LED module MS 9600LS Series Manual P N 52646 B2 2 12 2010 Master Programming Level Programming ANN LED Point Option Alarm Only for use with ANN RLED module If Point is selected as the module option and the module is programmed to annunciate alarms only the first ten LEDs on the first ANN LED module will display the system status information The remaining 30 LEDs on the first module and the last 30 LEDs on each additional module will dis play the active alarm status of each point in the Point Range programmed for that particular mod ule The points that will be annunciated on a particular ANN LED module depend on the programming options selected as far a which SLC loop and the device type detector or module to be annunciated The LED assignments for each ANN LED module will be as follows Alarm Silenced NAC 1 Fault NAC 2 Fault NAC 3 Fault NAC 4 Fault Earth Fault Battery Fault Charger Fault Disabled Maintenance Point 01 Point 02 Point 03 Point 04 Point 05 Active Alarm Active Alarm Active Alarm Active Alarm Active Alarm Point 06 Point 07 Point 08 Point 09 Point 10 Active Alarm Active Alarm Active Alarm Active Alarm Active Alarm Point 11 Point 12 Point 13 Point 14 Point 15 Active Alarm Active Alarm Active Alarm Active Alarm Active Alarm Po
14. MS 9600LS Series Manual P N 52646 B2 2 12 2010 143 Programming Maintenance Programming Level To change the date press 2 while viewing the Time and Date Screen The following screen will be displayed ENTER DATE ONTH DAY YEAR 81 81 2618 Date Screen A flashing cursor will appear on the left side of the display Enter the two digit month two digit day and four digit year The cursor will move one position to the right after each entry When the fourth digit of the year has been entered the display will return to the Time and Date Screen which will show the new date 3 7 6 Zone Setup Pi a lee Pressing 3 while viewing Maintenance Screen 2 will display the following screen 2 S5 STEM 3 Z0NE SETUP ZONE SETUP Maintenance Screen 2 1 EMNABLE 2 DISABLE S Z0NE 97 98 99 Zone Setup Screen 1 OHNE SETUP 1 Z DHES INSTALLED 2 Z0NES ENABLED S Z0NES DISABLED Zone Setup Screen 2 OHNE SETUP 1 Z0NE TYPES 2 Z0HES AVAILABLE S Z0NE MESSAGE Zone Setup Screen 3 144 MS 9600LS Series Manual P N 52646 B2 2 12 2010 Maintenance Programming Level Programming 1 ZONES INSTALLED 2 Z0NES ENABLED 3 Z0NES DISABLED Zone Setup Screen 2 Pressing while viewing Zone Setup screen 1 will display the following screen ONE TO ENABLE Enable Screen A flashing cursor appears to the right of the Z To enable a zone enter the two digit zone number 00 99 After the second d
15. SLC SLC SHIELD B A B A B A O 00000 B 8 wo m Figure 2 18 Serial Printer and Computer Connections Printer Configuration Refer to the documentation supplied with the printer for pertinent information about printer setup Set the printer s options as listed in the following table COMMUNICATION SETUP BUFFER LARGE DATA BITS 7 PARITY EVEN STOP BIT 1 STOP BAUD RATE 2400 4800 9600 AUTOMATIC LINE FEED NO AUTOMATIC CARRIAGE RETURN NO PC Configuration The Windows based PK CD Programming Utility Kit contains a CD ROM with on line help file 2 6 6 Annunciators Legacy ACM 8RF Relay Control Module The ACM 8RF module provides eight Form C relays with contacts rated for 5 amps MS 9600LS Series Manual P N 52646 B2 2 12 2010 59 Installation Optional Modules and Devices Legacy ACM Series Annunciators ACM and AFM Series Annunciators provide visual indications of FACP status in remote locations Refer to the appropriate annunciator manual for information on installation wiring and operation 60 MS 9600LS Series Manual P N 52646 B2 2 12 2010 Section 3 Programming 3 1 Programming Data Entry Programming can be accomplished using the FACP keypad or by connecting an optional standard computer keyboard The keyboard can be connected to the PS 2 connector J7 on the control panel main circuit board Local or remote programming and editing can also be accomplished using the DA
16. d Ll h a d Polarized Horns Notification Appliance Circuit polarity shown in alarm state Dummy Load all unused circuit TB4 Figure 2 7 NAC Style Y Class B Wiring 2 4 3 Style Z Class A NAC Wiring 2 Style Z Class A Notification Appliance Circuits supervised and power limited Polarized Bell AN AN Polarized Bell Polarized Strobe Yel Yel Polarized Strobe Polarized Horn PKI K Polarized Horn Notification Appliance Circuit 060000 VI polarity shown in alarm state NAC 1 NAC 2 Figure 2 8 NAC Style Z Class A Wiring MS 9600LS Series Manual P N 52646 B2 2 12 2010 9600nacy wmf 9600nacz cdr 49 Power limited Wiring Requirements Installation 2 5 Power limited Wiring Requirements Power limited and nonpower limited circuit wiring must remain separated in the cabinet All power limited circuit wiring must remain at least 0 25 6 35 mm away from any nonpower lim ited circuit wiring and nonpower limited circuit wiring must enter and exit the cabinet through dif ferent knockouts and or conduits A typical wiring diagram for the FACP is shown below limit ed c Class oe CUits Nonpow EF Linn Circ p Miteg Uits AC P Nono 9 S 800Wireroutes wmf Figure 2 9 Typical Power limited Wiring Requirements MS 9600LS Series Manual P N 52646 B2 2 12 2010 50 Optional Modules
17. represents the first of five possible software zones that the detector is assigned to NNN the three digit zone number from 000 099 e Vor indicates whether or not alarm verification is enabled V alarm verification enabled and alarm verification disabled 1D017 represents the Loop Device type and Device address 1 SLC Loop 1 D Detector and 017 Detector Address 017 70 MS 9600LS Series Manual P N 52646 B2 2 12 2010 Master Programming Level Programming The following examples show the editing of a photoelectric smoke detector with address 017 located on the first SLC loop EDIT DETECTOR iDBi 1 ENABLED YES 2 TYPE SMOKECLPHOTO S VERIFICATION OFF Edit Detector Screen 2 EDIT DETECTOR iDBi 1 WALETEST HO 2 PAS HO PRE SIGMAL HO Edit Detector Screen 3 EDIT DETECTOR 10617 Q 1 ZDHE ASSIGHMENT A t Edit Detector Screen 4 EDIT DETECTOR 10617 1 1 HOUHSADJECTIVE 2 DESCRIPTION tttttttttttttttttt Edit Detector Screen 5 Enable Disable Detector To Enable or Disable the detector press the 7 key while viewing the Edit Detector Screen 2 Each EDIT DETECTOR press of the key will toggle the screen between Enabled Yes and Enabled No If Enabled No is i a selected the detector will not be polled by the control panel preventing the detector from reporting 3 VERIFICATION alarms and troubles to the panel The control panel will display the device type and
18. 3 4 190 3 ohms maximum loop resistance allowed for wiring from control panel to Municipal Box Cut JP6 on the FACP main circuit board to supervise placement of 4XTMF module and circuit Cut JP5 on the FACP main circuit board to enable FACP Supervisory relay Refer to 4XTMF Transmitter Module Installation on page 55 for detailed information Municipal Box Circuit Gamewell Model M34 56 Local Energy Municipal Box Polarities shown in alarm condition Nonpower limited 0000000 4XTMF ud 4xtmfl wmf pu o md pi 007 E rm wet oa LLU LLU Figure C 3 Municipal Box Connected to 4XTMF Transmitter Module MS 9600LS Series Manual P N 52646 B2 2 12 2010 NFPA Standard Specific Requirements NFPA 72 Remote Station Protective Signaling System Notes 1 Cut Jumper JP6 on the FACP main circuit board to supervise placement of the 4XTMF module 2 Refer to 4XTMF Transmitter Module Installation on page 55 for detailed information CE ER 120 vac L2 AMPS 2 0 2 PRESS om al PL TEE SUPPLEMENTARY POLE 2 CONTACTS 2 RATED nie SIGNALING BATTERY ATi RELAY OKT FUSE sa 2ovac NC az P SE Sa RESISTIVE Q core 125v 3A 30VDC m 0 RESISTIVE aE raj 2 S NC 2 RS82 Remote Station Receiver UL listed Refer to FiresLite Alarms Inc Instruction Manual for Remote Station Receiver Model RS82 GROUNDING TERMINAL Pl izovac 128 50 60 HZ T INPUT
19. 3 2462 HO MESSAGE Pressing the down arrow key will display additional screens for Zones up to Z99 Press the number key corresponding to the Zone to be programmed Screens will be displayed allowing the program mer to select Messages 1 through 5 When a message is selected the display will return to the Zone Message screen showing the message selected for that particular zone In the example above Zone 01 has been programmed for Message 1 MS 9600LS Series Manual P N 52646 B2 2 12 2010 149 Section 4 Operating Instructions 4 1 Panel Control Buttons 4 1 1 Acknowledge Step The first press of the Acknowledge Step key silences the piezo sounder changes flashing LEDs to steady and also changes the status field on the LCD display from capital letters to small letters When the piezo is silenced an acknowledge message is sent to the printer and the history file Acknowledge also sends a silence piezo command to the optional annunciators connected to the FACP When more than one event exists the first press of the Acknowledge Step key functions as described in the preceding paragraph Subsequent pressing of the key steps through each off nor mal active event with alarm events having a higher priority than trouble and supervisory events 4 1 2 Alarm Silence The Alarm Silence key performs the same functions as Acknowledge Step In addition if an alarm exists it turns off all silenceable NACs Notification Appliance Circuits and
20. 9600cabnew wmf 45 Installation Power 2 2 Power WARNING RISK OF ELECTRICAL SHOCK AND EQUIPMENT DAMAGE SEVERAL DIFFERENT SOURCES OF POWER CAN BE CONNECTED TO THIS PANEL DISCON NECT ALL SOURCES OF POWER BEFORE SERVICING THE PANEL AND ASSOCIATED EQUIPMENT MAY BE DAMAGED BY REMOVING AND OR INSERTING CARDS MODULES OR INTERCONNECTING CABLES WHILE THIS UNIT IS ENERGIZED 2 2 1 AC Power and Earth Ground Connection Primary power required for the FACP is 120 VAC 60 Hz 3 0 amps for the MS 9600LS C and MS 9600UDLS or 240 VAC 50 Hz 1 5 amps 120 VAC for the MS 9600LSE and MS 9600UDLSE Overcurrent protection for this circuit must comply with Article 760 of the National Electrical Code NEC and or local codes Use 14 AWG 2 00 mm or larger wire with 600 volt insulation rating Make certain that the AC mains circuit breaker is off before wiring any connections between the mains and the control panel Connect wiring from the AC mains to TB1 on the FLPS 7 Power Supply being careful to observe proper connections Illustration depicts connection of 120 VAC to TB1 Note that the FLPS 7 Power Supply is con nected to the main circuit board by a cable connected to J1 Ensure that this cable is connected tb1 wmf Connect a wire from the grounding stud in the cabinet to a known solid earth ground refer to Fig ure 2 1 on page 43 This connection is vital for maintaining the control panel s immunity to unwanted transients generated by l
21. Doc 53033 IPDACT oo gt ANN ElA 485 TB6 m o m Internet Communicator On al E Doc 53109 l gt o EM DACT UD2 Communicator J2 Connector Lo Doc 53037 MS 9600LS FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL J10 J11 Connectors es gt E 2 SLC Loop ES a Addressable Devices and SLC Wiring S Doc 51309 Battery Connector TB2 mmmn esooseees S88 FF i E E E E Al o 5 L 4 y CHG 75 Charger CHG 120F Charger Doc 51315 Doc 50888 MS 9600LS Series Manual P N 52646 B2 2 12 2010 12 Notes MS 9600LS Series Manual P N 52646 B2 2 12 2010 Section 1 Product Description The MS 9600LS and MS 9600UDLS are compact cost effective intelligent addressable FACPs Fire Alarm Control Panels with an extensive list of powerful features The combination of Fire Lite s newer series devices and legacy 300 Series devices along with the MS 9600LS or MS 9600UDLS FACP offer the latest in fire protection technology The FLPS 7 power supply is a sep arate board while all other electronics are contained on a single main circuit board Both boards are mounted to a chassis and housed in a metal cabinet providing a complete fire control system for most applications Optional modu
22. The CHG 75 is capable of charging up to 75 AH lead acid batteries with the MS 9600LS FACP The FACP battery charger must be disabled when using the CHG 75 The charger and up to 26 AH batteries can be housed in the BB 26 battery box Larger batteries and the charger can be housed in the BB 55F battery box which can be mounted up to 20 feet away from the control panel Refer to the CHG 75 Manual for additional information CHG 120 Battery Charger The CHG 120 is capable of charging up to 120 AH lead acid batteries with the FACP The FACP battery charger must be disabled when using the CHG 120 The batteries and charger can be housed in the BB 55F battery box which can be mounted up to 20 feet away from the control panel Note that when using the BB 55F for housing the charger and batteries greater than 26AH multiple BB 55Fs are required Refer to the CHG 120 Manual for additional information MS 9600LS Series Manual P N 52646 B2 2 12 2010 Accessories Product Description 1 8 6 New ANN BUS Annunciators Devices NOTE Refer to Canadian Application on page 200 for specific Canadian requirements WARNING RISK OF ELECTRICAL SHOCK AND EQUIPMENT DAMAGE DISCONNECT ALL SOURCES OF POWER AC AND DC BEFORE INSTALLING OR REMOVING ANY MODULES OR WIRING The legacy ACS annunciators may not be used if new ANN BUS annunciators are being used due to incompatible serial communication protocols A variety of optional devices can be connect
23. and Edit Module Screen for Control Modules on page 88 for information on additional device types e Second line in display lt ADJ gt refers to the user programmed adjective descriptor from library list resident in the control panel or custom entry via PC lt NOUN gt refers to the user programmed noun descriptor from library list resident in the control panel or custom entry via PC Third line in display JVVREP indicates an invalid reply from the addressable device Other possible troubles include Y SHORT indicating a shorted circuit on an addressable device Y OPEN indicating an open circuit on an addressable device Y DIRTY maintenance alert indicating that a detector is near but below the allowed alarm limit and is in need of maintenance before the performance is compromised Y DIRTY2 maintenance alert indicating that a detector needs immediate maintenance since it has been within 80 of its alarm threshold for 24 hours Y INVREP maintenance alert indicating a hardware problem in the detector Y TEST F indicating a detector has failed the automatic test operation which functionally checks its sensing chamber and electronics MS 9600LS Series Manual P N 52646 B2 2 12 2010 Alarm Operation Operating Instructions Y INV ID indicating that an incorrect device code Type ID has been programmed for an installed device for example Photo has been programmed but an Ion detector has been in
24. bles exist in the system will have the same effect as pressing the Acknowledge Step key If multiple trouble conditions exist in the system they will be automatically scrolled on the LCD display at a three second rate fa combination of alarms troubles and or supervisory conditions simultaneously occur in the system only the alarms are scrolled on the display 4 5 Alarm Operation Alarm operation is similar to trouble operation with the following differences e The piezo sounder produces a steady output as opposed to a pulsed output The Fire Alarm LED flashes 1 second On and 1 second Off The LCD displays Alarm along with the device name type address adjective noun associated zones and time date e Alarms latch and are not allowed to clear automatically e Alarms activate software zones if so programmed Timers for Silence Inhibit Autosilence and Trouble Reminder are started e Alarms activate the general alarm relay and general alarm zone Z00 e The trouble relay is not activated e Store event in history buffer Terminate upload or download communications e Alarms must be Acknowledged before the FACP can be reset A typical alarm display would be as illustrated below ALARM PULL STATION ADJ gt lt HOUH gt 6508 18 66 618816 1M661 MS 9600LS Series Manual P N 52646 B2 2 12 2010 153 Operating Instructions Supervisory Operation Note that the device type which in this example is PULL STATION can b
25. fires which have little visible smoke Detectors that have ion izing type sensing chambers tend to detect fast flaming fires better than smoldering fires Because fires develop in different ways and are often unpredictable in their growth neither type of detector is necessarily best and a given type of detector may not provide adequate warning of a fire Smoke detectors cannot be expected to provide adequate warning of fires caused by arson children playing with matches especially in bedrooms smoking in bed and violent explosions caused by escaping gas improper storage of flammable materials etc Heat detectors do not sense particles of combustion and alarm only when heat on their sensors increases at a predeter mined rate or reaches a predetermined level Rate of rise heat detectors may be subject to reduced sensitivity over time For this reason the rate of rise feature of each detector should be tested at least once per year by a qualified fire pro tection specialist Heat detectors are designed to protect property not life IMPORTANT Smoke detectors must be installed in the same room as the control panel and in rooms used by the sys tem for the connection of alarm transmission wiring communi cations signaling and or power If detectors are not so located a developing fire may damage the alarm system crip pling its ability to report a fire Audible warning devices such as bells may not alert people if these devi
26. guarantee warning or protection against fire A fire alarm sys tem may not provide timely or adequate warning or simply may not function for a variety of reasons Smoke detectors may not sense fire where smoke cannot reach the detectors such as in chimneys in or behind walls on roofs or on the other side of closed doors Smoke detectors also may not sense a fire on another level or floor of a building A second floor detector for example may not sense a first floor or basement fire Particles of combustion or smoke from a developing fire may not reach the sensing chambers of smoke detectors because e Barriers such as closed or partially closed doors walls or chimneys may inhibit particle or smoke flow Smoke particles may become cold stratify and not reach the ceiling or upper walls where detectors are located Smoke particles may be blown away from detectors by air outlets Smoke particles may be drawn into air returns before reaching the detector The amount of smoke present may be insufficient to alarm smoke detectors Smoke detectors are designed to alarm at various levels of smoke density If such density levels are not created by a developing fire at the location of detectors the detectors will not go into alarm Smoke detectors even when working properly have sensing limitations Detectors that have photoelectronic sensing chambers tend to detect smoldering fires better than flaming
27. system programming options and all programmed addressable devices from the nonvolatile mem ory of the FACP This function is useful when the control panel is first installed prior to autopro gramming Note that it is necessary to autoprogram after using the Clear Whole System function Pressing 2 for All Loops while viewing the Clear Program Screen 1 will clear all programming related to all SLC loops and connected addressable devices Pressing 3 for Loop 1 while viewing the Clear Program Screen 1 will clear only the program ming related to SLC Loop 1 and the connected addressable devices Pressing Z for Loop 2 while viewing the Clear Program Screen 2 will clear only the program ming related to SLC Loop 2 and the connected addressable devices Before executing any of the Clear commands listed above the control panel will provide a warning to the user by prompting with the following display WARNING SYSTEM CHANGE PROCEED 1 YES 2 N0 Pressing will cause the control panel to carry out the selected clear option Pressing 2 will pre vent programming from being cleared 136 MS 9600LS Series Manual P N 52646 B2 2 12 2010 Master Programming Level Programming 3 6 12 Program Check ee RAMING The Program Check feature allows the programmer to view the zones which have been pro 2 CLEAR PROGRAM grammed to the Notification Appliance Circuits on the control panel but have not been pro S PROGRAM CHECK Cait hee
28. 02 52 03 53 04 54 05 55 06 56 07 57 08 58 09 59 10 60 11 61 12 62 13 63 14 64 15 65 16 66 17 67 18 68 19 69 20 70 21 71 22 72 23 73 24 74 25 75 26 76 27 77 28 78 29 79 30 80 31 81 32 82 33 83 34 84 35 85 36 86 37 87 38 88 39 89 40 90 41 91 42 92 43 93 44 94 45 95 46 96 47 97 48 98 49 99 50 100 Table A 5 Blank Module Programming Sheet 1 of 2 184 MS 9600LS Series Manual P N 52646 B2 2 12 2010 Correlations Software Zones MONITOR CONTROL MODULE ZONE ASSIGNMENT Address Device Type Zone Number ADJ NOUN Address Device Type Zone Number ADJ NOUN 101 151 102 152 103 153 104 105 106 154 155 156 107 157 108 158 109 159 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 Table A 6 Blank Module Programming Sheet 2 of 2 MS 9600LS Series Manual P N 52646 B2 2 12 2010 185 Appendix B Default Programming The following table provides a list of the programming options and their factory default settings Program Option Factory Defa
29. 1 ADO 2 DELETE S EDIT Modules Screen Add Module Pressing while viewing the Modules Screen will display the following screen which allows the programmer to add a new module address to programming ADD MODULE ENTER MODULE ure Add Module Screen 1 A flashing cursor will appear in the position of the first asterisk to the left The programmer keys in the three digit module address such as 005 When the last digit is keyed in the following screen will be displayed ADD MODULE 1 CONTROL 2 MONITOR Add Module Screen 2 78 MS 9600LS Series Manual P N 52646 B2 2 12 2010 Master Programming Level Programming Pressing for Control Module or 2 for Monitor Module will cause the following screen to be dis played ADD MODULE MODULE BBS IS ADDED Add Module Screen 3 The programmer can continue adding modules by pressing the ESC or left arrow key which will return the display to the Add Module Screen 1 m Delete Module Pressing 2 in the Modules Screen will display the Delete Module Screen which allows the program MODULES mer to delete a specific module 1 ADD 2 DELETE 3 EDIT DELETE MODULE Modules Screen ENTER MODULE ya Delete Module Screen A flashing cursor will appear in the position of the first asterisk to the left Using the panel keypad key in the module address such as 005 When the last digit is keyed in the following confirmation that the module has been de
30. 12 2010 167 Operating Instructions Read Status The Annunciator Screen indicates if Terminal mode options are enabled or disabled Pressing 2 for ACS Options while viewing the Annunciator Screen allows the operator to view the ACS Options screen ACS OPTIONS ACS ENABLED HO 2 ACS ADDRESSES UDACT ENABLED WO ACS Options Screen The ACS Options screen indicates if the ACS option has been enabled YES or disabled NO Pressing 2 for ACS Addresses while viewing the ACS Options screen will display screens with ACS addresses 1 31 and whether a device is installed at that address YES or not installed NO The ACS Options screen indicates if a UDACT is installed YES or if a UDACT is not installed NO Pressing 3 for ANN BUS Options while viewing the Annunciator Screen will display the following screens ANH BUS ENABLED HO 2 MODULES INSTALLED S ANH S PG OPTIONS ANN BUS Screen 1 ANH BUS 1 ANH Se8 OPTIONS ANN BUS Screen 2 The ANN BUS Screen 1 indicates if the ANN BUS has been enabled YES or disabled NO Pressing 2 for Modules Installed while viewing ANN BUS Screen 1 will display screens for ANN BUS Addresses 1 8 and the devices installed at each address Subscreen will display the options that have been programmed for each device Pressing 3 for ANN S PG Options while viewing ANN BUS Screen 1 will display the options selected for the installed serial or parallel printer Pressing 1 for ANN 80 Options while v
31. 2 12 2010 Accessories Product Description m Wiring ANN 80 to FACP The following steps can be used as a guide to wire the annunciator Make certain all power has been removed from the FACP prior to annunciator installation 1 Route wires from hole in backplate through wiring channel and then to ANN 80 terminal block TB1 wiring channel E L No k ann 80boxinside wmf 2 Remove appropriate amount of wire insulation Connect the wiring from the FACP ANN BUS to annunciator TB1 terminals 3 A amp 4 B Make certain to connect A to A and B to B 4 Ifappropriate connect the wiring going to the next device on the ANN BUS to TB1 terminals 3 amp 4 Make certain to connect A to A and B to B 5 Connect the wiring from the 24 VDC power source to annunciator TB1 terminals 1 amp 2 Make certain to observe proper polarity 6 Ifappropriate connect the power wiring going to the next device to terminals 1 amp 2 Make certain to observe proper polarity 7 After all connections are made remove extra wire from inside of annunciator by dressing it neatly through wire channel with any excess wire pushed back through hole into electrical box ANN BUS ANN BUS and power wiring are supervised and power limited 24 VDC nonresettable
32. 3 0 amps of current Total system current in alarm cannot exceed 7 0 amps refer to Calculating the System Current Draw on page 174 Use UL listed 24 VDC notification appliances only Circuits are supervised and power limited Refer to the Device Compatibility Document for a listing of compatible notification appliances The NACs which are located on the main circuit board may be expanded via the FCPS Series field charger power sup plies MS 9600LS Series Manual P N 52646 B2 2 12 2010 47 Installation Notification Appliance Circuits The following sections describe the configuration and wiring of Style Y and Style Z Notification Appliance Circuits on the FACP main circuit board The NACs are configured for Style Y Class B from the factory Refer to Configuring NACs on page 48 for information on changing the NAC configuration to Style Z Class A and preparing the NACKEY configuration card located in JP8 when installing a 4XTMF Transmitter Module 2 4 1 Configuring NACs The Notification Appliance Circuits on the main circuit board are configured for Style Y or Style Z by properly orienting the NACKEY card in JP8 which is located at the top of the main circuit board near the NAC Terminal TB4 The default configuration is for Style Y Class B Refer to Figure 2 6 for information on installing the NACKEY card NACKEY Card e Style Z Class A install NACKEY i
33. 35 Zone 75 7 Battery Fault Zone 36 Zone 76 8 Charger Fault Zone 37 Zone 77 9 NAC Fault Zone 38 Zone 78 10 Disabled Zone 39 Zone 79 11 Zone 00 Zone 40 Zone 80 12 Zone 01 Zone 41 Zone 81 13 Zone 02 Zone 42 Zone 82 14 Zone 03 Zone 43 Zone 83 15 Zone 04 Zone 44 Zone 84 16 Zone 05 Zone 45 Zone 85 17 Zone 06 Zone 46 Zone 86 18 Zone 07 Zone 47 Zone 87 19 Zone 08 Zone 48 Zone 88 20 Zone 09 Zone 49 Zone 89 21 Zone 10 Zone 50 Zone 90 22 Zone 11 Zone 51 Zone 91 23 Zone 12 Zone 52 Zone 92 24 Zone 13 Zone 53 Zone 93 25 Zone 14 Zone 54 Zone 94 26 Zone 15 Zone 55 Zone 95 27 Zone 16 Zone 56 Zone 96 28 Zone 17 Zone 57 Zone 97 29 Zone 18 Zone 58 Zone 98 30 Zone 19 Zone 59 Zone 99 31 Zone 20 Zone 60 Not Used 32 Zone 21 Zone 61 Not Used 33 Zone 22 Zone 62 Not Used 34 Zone 23 Zone 63 Not Used 35 Zone 24 Zone 64 Not Used 36 Zone 25 Zone 65 Not Used 37 Zone 26 Zone 66 Not Used 38 Zone 27 Zone 67 Not Used 39 Zone 28 Zone 68 Not Used 40 Zone 29 Zone 69 Not Used 124 MS 9600LS Series Manual P N 52646 B2 2 12 2010 Master Programming Level Programming ANN I O Point Option If Point is selected as the module option the first ten LEDs on the first ANN I O module will display the system status information The remaining 30 LEDs on the first module and 40 LEDs on each additional module will display the active alarm status of each point in the Point Range programmed for that particular module The points that will be annunciated on a particular
34. 80 and FACP is accomplished over a two wire RS 485 serial interface employ ing the ANN BUS communication format The devices are powered via two additional wires from either the host FACP or remote UL listed filtered power supply The function buttons keyswitch and piezo sounder may be individually enabled and disabled through the FACP software Refer to ANN BUS Options on page 121 for a description of this feature and programming information Note that if the keyswitch is enabled and remains in the unlocked position for more than two min utes without any buttons being pressed on the annunciator a trouble indication will be annunciated m Specifications e Operating Voltage Range 18 VDC to 28 VDC e Current Consumption 24 VDC nominal filtered and nonresettable e Normal Standby no activity 37 0 mA Trouble 39 0 mA e Alarm 40 0 mA e AC Fail not backlit 15 0 mA For use indoors in a dry location m Installation Ensure that all power AC and DC has been removed from the FACP before installing the annunci ator m Opening Closing Annunciator The following procedure details the steps used to open the annunciator in order to access the termi nal block and DIP switches refer to Figure 1 5 on page 28 Turn the key switch to the ON Unlocked position by turning the key counter clockwise 2 Push in the snap latch located on the right side of the unit while pulling the cover open 3 To close the cover make cert
35. 8th day of the month and 0 for the year 2010 Device Address M00 in this example represents SLC Loop1 M represents a module and 001 represents device address 001 4 6 Supervisory Operation Supervisory operation is similar to alarm operation but with the following differences e The piezo sounder pulses Y second On and Y second Off e The Supervisory LED flashes 2 second On and Y second Off The LCD displays the status label Active Supervisory along with the device name type address adjective noun associated zones and time date e The supervisory relay is activated The alarm relay is not activated e Silenced alarms are not resounded Timers are not started e Store event in history buffer Terminate upload or download communications e Supervisory condition must be Acknowledged before the FACP can be reset 154 MS 9600LS Series Manual P N 52646 B2 2 12 2010 Process Monitor Operation Operating Instructions A typical Supervisory event would be displayed as illustrated in the following ACTIVE SUPERVISORY ADJ lt NOUN gt 6006 16 36A 616816 1M661 Note that like alarms supervisory signals latch except when programmed for supervisory autore settable and can be assigned to software zones Supervisory alarms do not cause resound as do other alarm conditions Open circuits in supervisory wiring are processed by the control panel the same way as other trouble conditions Refer to Alarm Ope
36. A A ated al canes deen recess law ean ee 149 6 MS 9600LS Series Manual P N 52646 B2 2 12 2010 Table of Contents Section 4 Operating InStrUCTONS iii iia 150 4 1 Panel Control Buttons ii we 150 41 1 Acknowledge Step A dc 150 AVDA Vari Silence a a aa eet ates 150 A N32 Dri ii a 150 AeA RES os dad dende se SUG Nelle Yee dias da kG ied ak nie ee Eo o Ed 150 4 2 TIED Indicators cece ise A a Ne ee 150 4 3 Normal Opera ippo 151 4 4 Tole Operation ae 152 ALS Alam O PEO a A A aa ees ee 153 ALOE SUDETVISOLY Opera ii a aii 154 A Process Monitor Opera da iba 155 4 8 Hazard Condition Operation ii cis 155 4 9 Medical Alert Condition Operation ssenarini naiai E EE E E EEN e 156 4 10 Programmed Zone Operation miii i i siei eiior iE Er EE SEE ESETE EE E i R Er iE 156 4 11 Disable Enable Opera encinar aotearoa dsp 156 4 12 Waterflow Circuits Operation niscenire igesi iiin i i a ERE EE ER ie E EEE E 156 4 13 Detector Function Sinsin e e Ee cui Hi acts a a A O BT 156 4 14 Time Functions Real Time ClocK ssesessssenseeeeseeseseesrsreseeesssesessesteessesessteesstesesesstsesstenestesesessreesersesees 157 AVS NAC Opera ia A as eee 157 4 16 Synchronized NAC Operator cis 157 4 17 Coded Operation ie iss e ee e retest ncecieest e Hates arta 157 4 18 Presiona a eles hese whee aes eae A adele Se hack on Oa eE RE e Cashed toda Ray tae E EEE 158 4 19 Positive Alarm Sequence ccceccesccescesseescescecsecseescecsecsaesaecnecsaec
37. A Ri 97 Zone Pi A A a A A Cas A IE a ida 98 ZONES Avalable ti ler Miah tae e re o Mt de on do A 99 JOA Loop UN A a A a ea a eae 99 LOOP letra bio 99 Coop PA A a 100 SN A NO 100 Trouble REM A A AE cee ee EEA 101 Bi A A star nate CaS Ey 101 TIME Date cies rye A Crone ed E ata Rive E alata he a ape da aon 103 A O NN 105 NAC Notification Appliance Circuit ccccccescessesseeseeeeeeseeseecsecsaecsecsaesaecesseseeeesseseneeaeeneeeneeeseenees 107 A O O 112 CA a sai 113 Watertlow Silenceablescoc aa sai cap heat 114 3 0 6 Verify LOOPS E a e A E REEE A e EE T E a EE E AE RE E e EEE E 114 36 7 O 115 View Events oiite A A A A o Bibs 115 EAS O E EE ETE 115 3 60 85 Walt A AA A h e SIA 116 3 6 9 Option Modules rias A Ge ee ae te 117 Ammunciatra UDALA diia 118 On Board DAC Inda ea oleroa butt dis 134 Printer PEA A A A A aa 134 36 10 Password Char A sa 135 IO Clear Pro A ei 136 3 60 12 Program Check cia sois eii 137 3 7 Maintenance Programming Lera ia 138 Dal PO do Bec iat Sak ka de ets Mote de Se kD Elo do 139 A A ye sce e E E AA O evil AEA Lae fee Tee ee 140 FUI Program Check 2 13 oie art vaseccas cates tesecevsb se 141 Bi Ae W alktest cece Mesias vite A ain Bee eee es epee 142 O SLM ris A e o A O 143 33763 ZONES MU ii A AA A A AA ie Weeds 144 Zones std tt a ed e e e edo a E oh al ado late 146 Zones Enabled ita ta ed 146 Zones Disabled a e de e dt a Wee LAO ee ed Edi 147 Zone VV NN 147 LO AV AILADC a tato ish at 148 Zone MESS ii
38. Alarm Trouble and Supervisory If Point is selected as the module option and the module is programmed to annunciate alarms troubles and supervisories the first ten LEDs on the first ANN LED module will display the sys tem status information The remaining 30 LEDs on the first module and the last 30 LEDs on the remaining modules will display the alarm trouble and supervisory status for each of the ten zones in the Point Range programmed for that particular module The LED assignments for each ANN LED module will be as follows Alarm Silenced NAC 1 Fault NAC 2 Fault NAC 3 Fault NAC 4 Fault Earth Fault Battery Fault Charger Fault Disabled Maintenance Point 01 Point 02 Point 03 Point 04 Point 05 Active Alarm Active Alarm Active Alarm Active Alarm Active Alarm Point 01 Point 02 Point 03 Point 04 Point 05 Trouble Trouble Trouble Trouble Trouble Point 01 Point 02 Point 03 Point 04 Point 05 Supervisory Supervisory Supervisory Supervisory Supervisory Point 06 Point 07 Point 08 Point 09 Point 10 Active Alarm Active Alarm Active Alarm Active Alarm Active Alarm Point 06 Point 07 Point 08 Point 09 Point 10 Trouble Trouble Trouble Trouble Trouble Point 06 Point 07 Point 08 Point 09 Point 10 Supervisory Supervisory Supervisory Supervisory Supervisory ANN LED Module 1 Point Range 01 10 Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Point 11
39. CODING 1 TEMPORAL 2 TWO STAGE 3 MIN 3 TWO STAGE 3 MIH Coding Screen 2 MS 9600LS Series Manual P N 52646 B2 2 12 2010 Master Programming Level Programming y 1 Z0NE 66 66 60 H 66 2 SIL INHIBITED MO NAC Screen 3 The programmer can select the notification appliance output by pressing the number corresponding to the desired output The coding selections are e Steady a continuous output with no coding March Time 120 ppm pulse per minute output e California 10 seconds on and 5 seconds off Temporal Y second on Y second off Y second on Y second off Y second on 14 second off e Two Stage refer to Two Stage Operation on page 111 for description Selection of one of the above options will cause the control panel to store the information in mem ory and return the display to NAC Screen 2 which will display the new coding choice Two Stage Operation Two Stage operation consists of the following e Ist stage output 20 ppm pulse per minute coding e 2nd stage output Temporal coding as described above If Two Stage operation is programmed as the Coding option the following sequence of events will occur during an alarm 1 The on board NACs which are programmed to General Alarm Zone 0 will activate with a Ist stage output upon activation of any alarm point 2 Ifthe activated alarm point is directly mapped to a zone which is programmed to an on board NAC that NAC will go
40. Central Station The DACT UD2 is supplied standard with the MS 9600UDLS E e Optional PK CD contains PS Tools utility for local or remote Upload Download of program and data e Optional DP 9692 dress panel required for Canadian applications 1 3 Specifications AC Power TB1 of Power Supply Board MS 9600LS C amp MS 9600UDLS 120 VAC 50 60 Hz 3 0 amps L1 Hot L2 Neutral MS 9600LSE amp MS 9600UDLSE 240 VAC 50 Hz 1 5 amps L1 Hot Leg 1 L2 Hot Leg 2 Wire size minimum 14 AWG 2 00 mm with 600 V insulation Battery Sealed Lead Acid Only TB2 Maximum Charging Circuit Normal Flat Charge 27 6 VDC 1 00 amp Maximum Battery Size 26 Amp Hour Minimum Battery Size 12 Amp Hour FACP cabinet holds maximum of two 18 Amp Hour batteries For greater than 18 Amp Hour up to 26 Amp Hour batteries use BB26 Battery Box For greater than 26 Amp Hour up to 75 Amp Hour batteries use the CHG 75 Battery Charger and BB26 or BB 55F Battery Box For greater than 75 Amp Hour up to 120 Amp Hour batteries use the CHG 120F Battery Charger and BB 55F Battery Box Jumper JP3 on the FACP main circuit board must be removed to disable the FACP battery char ger when using the CHG 75 or CHG 120F Communication Loop Standard TB8 and Optional SLC Expander Module J3 24 VDC nominal 27 6 VDC maximum Maximum length refer to Wire Requirements on page 196 Maximum loop current is 400 mA short circuit or 100 mA normal Maximum l
41. Control Panel Contains the main control board cabinet backbox and door main power supply transformer and power supply Batteries Refer to Power Supply Calculations on page 174 for Standby Power Requirements Initiating Devices Connected to one of the control panel s Initiating Device Circuits Notification Appliances Connected to the control panel s Notification Appliance Circuits via a control module The following additional equipment is needed for compliance with the NFPA 72 standards listed below NFPA 72 NATIONAL FIRE ALARM STANDARDS FOR NFPA 72 Central Station Service Protected Premises Unit or Remote Station Service 411UDAC for connection to a compatible listed Central Station DACR or Protected Premises Receiving Unit This unit must be installed as outlined in Figure C 1 Central Station Service Using 411UDAC on page 188 OR 411UD may be installed as illustrated in Figure C 2 FACP Connection to 411UD on page 189 OR 4XTMF Transmitter Module for connection to the RS82 Remote Station Receiver See Figure C 4 Remote Station Connection Using 4XTMF Module on page 191 for installation instructions for this unit NFPA 72 Auxiliary Fire Alarm System 4XTMF Transmitter Module for connection to a compatible listed Local Energy Municipal Box This unit must be installed as illustrated in the section titled 4XTMF Transmitter Module Installation on page 55 and as outlined in Figure C 3 Municip
42. Line 2 169 Supervisory 154 SUPERVISORY AR 113 sync programming 108 see also synchronization 112 synchronization 157 166 by manufacturer 112 programming 112 see also strobe synchronization 14 synchronized 157 Synchronized Signals 157 and silenceable circuits 109 System Maintenance Level 143 System Point 162 System Setup 100 T Time and Date Maintenance Level 143 Time setting 103 Time Date setting 100 103 Timers 100 Transmitter Module 55 see also 4XTMF module 21 TR CE trim ring 22 Trouble 152 trouble display 152 trouble relay 14 Trouble Reminder 100 159 165 trouble responses 152 Two Stage 96 two stage operation 111 Type control module 89 detector 71 monitor module 82 NAC 109 type code control module 90 supervision 157 verification 14 U UL power limited wiring requirements see also power limited and nonpower lim ited 47 V Verification detector 72 Verify Loops 114 View Events 115 voltage measurements 164 ranges 164 W Walktest 14 72 90 116 audible 116 Maintenance Level 142 operation 160 selection 84 silent 116 waterflow nonsilenceable 98 114 148 silenceable 98 100 114 148 Waterflow Delay timer 105 106 Waterflow Retard Timer 159 Wire Requirements 196 wiring AC Power 46 earth ground 46 NAC Style Y 49 NAC Style Z 49 SLC 2 58 wiring Style 13 Z Z00 74 84 Z97 PAS zone 73 Z98 73 Zone 97 96 Zone 98 96 Zone Assignment 73 84 112 control module 90 Zone Setup 9
43. LiteSpeed and CLIP mode CLIP mode Classic Loop Interface Protocol is used for the older leg acy addressable devices such as the M300 Series modules and detectors LiteSpeed mode is used for newer addressable devices such as the 350 series or newer for quicker response times Note that the legacy devices can operate only in CLIP mode while the newer devices are compatible with both modes of operation Pressing 3 while viewing the Loop Setup Screen will allow the program mer to select between CLIP and LiteSpeed mode Each press of the 3 key will toggle the setting between CLIP and LiteSpeed mode Device Addressing It is important to note that the FACP addressable device capacity is 159 detectors and 159 con trol monitor modules per SLC loop Since older legacy addressable devices cannot be set to addresses above 099 the newer series devices must be used when addresses 700 to 159 are to be installed It is permissible to mix old and new devices in the same panel however the FACP must be programmed for CLIP mode 3 6 5 System Setup 100 System Setup allows the programmer to configure the following control panel features e Trouble Reminder This feature when enabled provides an audible reminder that an alarm or trouble still exists on the FACP after the control panel has been silenced The control panel piezo sounder will pulse once every 15 seconds during an alarm and every two minutes during a trouble condition after the Alarm Silenc
44. Monitor Module Operation 198 F 2 1 HVAC RESTART The HVAC RESTART type code can be assigned to any addressable monitor module for the purpose of resetting deactivating the HVAC SHUTDN control module and turning the fans back on The HVAC RESTART monitor module acts globally throughout the FACP system and therefore is not programmed to a particular software zone To program this feature in the FACP Program the HVAC RESTART type code to the monitor module which will be used to deactivate the HVAC SHUTDN control module and restart the fans refer to Type Monitor under the section titled Edit Module Screen for Monitor Module on page 79 The HVAC RESTART monitor module does not latch when activated Pressing a switch connected to the monitor module will deactivate the HVAC SHUTDN control relay module only if there are no alarm conditions The HVAC SHUTDN control relay module can be deactivated if trouble conditions exist on the FACP MS 9600LS Series Manual P N 52646 B2 2 12 2010 Monitor Module Operation HVAC Control F 2 2 HVAC OVRRIDE The HVAC OVRRIDE type code can be assigned to any addressable monitor module for the purpose of overriding or preventing the HVAC SHUTDN control modules from activating The HVAC OVRRIDE monitor module acts globally throughout the FACP system and therefore is not programmed to a particular software zone To program this feature in the FACP e Program the HVAC OVRRIDE type code to the mon
45. Noun Screen 5 Noun Screen 6 Se le ie ei ee le ee SPE EEE EEE tt 1 STRIRWAY 1 20HE 2 STOREROOM S WING Noun Screen 7 Noun Screen 8 Pressing 3 or 4 while viewing the Noun Adjective Screen will display screens similar to the previ ous Adjective and Noun Screens The new screens will list Custom Adjectives and Nouns which have been programmed into the control panel using the PS Tools programming kit 86 MS 9600LS Series Manual P N 52646 B2 2 12 2010 Master Programming Level Programming EDIT MONITOR 1 NOUN ADJECTIVE 2 DESCRIPTION PEERS EEE EEE EEE Edit Monitor Screen 5 Description The Description selection allows the programmer to enter additional information about the monitor module currently being programmed This information will be displayed as part of the device label on the LCD display Pressing 2 while viewing Edit Monitor Screen 5 will cause the following screen to be displayed DESCRIPTION 1612 HOUNADJECTIVE NI Noun Adjective Screen A flashing cursor will appear at the first asterisk to the left The programmer can enter additional descriptive information about the device being programmed This information will appear on the LCD display along with the standard device label information A maximum of 20 characters including spaces can be entered To enter alphanumeric characters from the keypad repeatedly press the appropriate key until the desired character is displayed in the first p
46. PC Personal Computer connection for uploading and downloading panel data 3 0PTION MODULES Programming Screen 3 MS 9600LS Series Manual P N 52646 B2 2 12 2010 117 Programming Master Programming Level 118 Pressing 3 while viewing Programming Screen 3 will display the following screen OPTION MODULES 1 ANHUNCIATORSSUDACT 2 DHBOARD DACT S PRINTER PC PR4868 Options Screen Note that PR4800 in the display indicates that a supervised printer configured for 4800 baud has been previously programmed into the system Annunciators UDACT Pressing while viewing the Options Screen will cause the control panel to display the following screens ANHUNCIATORS 1 TERM ENABLED HO 2 ACS OPTIONS S ANH BUS OPTIONS Annunciator Screen A Terminal Mode annunciator ACS Mode annunciator or ANN BUS annunciator module can be installed in the system Do not use a mix of ACS annunciators and ANN annunciators since they use different communication protocols ACS or ANN annunciators use the same TB6 terminal block connection To install any of these devices press the number corresponding to the desired device shown in the Annunciator Screen Term Options While viewing the Annunciators Screen each press of the key for Term Options will cause the display to toggle between Term Enabled No and Term Enabled Yes NOTE The LCD 80F is a Terminal Mode annunciator To enable the FACP for LCD 80F operation press 1 fo
47. PG Port Parallel Banner ANN S PG Baud 9600 Time Format 12 Hr ANN S PG Data Bits 7 Hours Setting 12 ANN S PG Parity Even Minutes Setting 00 ANN S PG Stop Bits 1 Second Settings 00 ANN S PG Offline Timer 60 AM PM Setting AM ANN S PG Printer Supervision No Month Setting 01 ANN 80 Piezo Enabled Yes Day Setting 01 ANN 80 Lock Enabled Yes Year Setting 00 ANN 80 Acknowledge Button Enabled Yes PK Plus Secret Code 00000000 ANN 80 Silence Button Enabled Yes Trouble Call Limit 0 ANN 80 Reset Button Enabled Yes Daylight Savings Yes ANN 80 Drill Button Enabled Yes Month Start Daylight Savings March ANN I O Point Zone Zone Week Start Daylight Savings 2nd Week ANN I O Range 00 29 Month End Daylight Savings November ANN I O Active LEDs Only Week End Daylight ist Week ANN RLY Relay 1 Zone 1 Verification No o o llas through iesnas te Ring Count 0 ANN RLY Relay 10 Zone 10 PAS Timer 0 ANN LED Point Zone Zone Presignal Timer 0 ANN LED Alarms ATS Alarm Trbl Supv ATS Waterflow Retard Timer 0 ANN LED Range 0 9 186 MS 9600LS Series Manual P N 52646 B2 2 12 2010 Appendix C NFPA Standard Specific Requirements The FACP has been designed for use in commercial industrial and institutional applications and meets the requirements for service under the National Fire Protection Association NFPA Standards outlined in this Appendix The minimum system components required for compliance with the appropriate NFPA standard are listed below Fire Alarm
48. Point 130 Not Used 21 Point 11 Point 51 Point 91 Point 131 Not Used 22 Point 12 Point 52 Point 92 Point 132 Not Used 23 Point 13 Point 53 Point 93 Point 133 Not Used 24 Point 14 Point 54 Point 94 Point 134 Not Used 25 Point 15 Point 55 Point 95 Point 135 Not Used 26 Point 16 Point 56 Point 96 Point 136 Not Used 27 Point 17 Point 57 Point 97 Point 137 Not Used 28 Point 18 Point 58 Point 98 Point 138 Not Used 29 Point 19 Point 59 Point 99 Point 139 Not Used 30 Point 20 Point 60 Point 100 Point 140 Not Used 31 Point 21 Point 61 Point 101 Point 141 Not Used 32 Point 22 Point 62 Point 102 Point 142 Not Used 33 Point 23 Point 63 Point 103 Point 143 Not Used 34 Point 24 Point 64 Point 104 Point 144 Not Used 35 Point 25 Point 65 Point 105 Point 145 Not Used 36 Point 26 Point 66 Point 106 Point 146 Not Used 37 Point 27 Point 67 Point 107 Point 147 Not Used 38 Point 28 Point 68 Point 108 Point 148 Not Used 39 Point 29 Point 69 Point 109 Point 149 Not Used 40 Point 30 Point 70 Point 110 Point 150 Not Used MS 9600LS Series Manual P N 52646 B2 2 12 2010 125 Programming Master Programming Level ANN LED Options Pressing 2 for Module Options while viewing ANN BUS Address Screen when the ANN LED option is selected will display the following screen ANH LED ADDR 4 LOOP1 DET 1 16 ALARM SUPER TEL ANN LED Address Screen 1 ANH LED ADDR 4 1 PDINT ZOHE 2 ALARMIATS ANN LED Address Screen 2 ANH LED ADDR 4 1 RANGE 2 DE
49. RST Zool Zones Screen 1 POWER CHARGER 28 36 NAC 1 2 394 HAC 2 2 394 Zones Screen 2 Zones Screen 3 A real time display of control panel voltages can be used to determine if system problems exist Note that Zones Screen 3 will only be displayed if the NACKEY NAC option card is installed in JP8 of the main circuit board for Class B operation The following table lists the circuit being measured possible conditions and their respective volt age ranges Circuit Condition Voltage Range Normal Battery nominal 27 05 to 28 15 VDC Battery Low Battery 20 0 to 20 8 VDC No Battery 0 to 18 36 VDC 24V Resettable Normal 21 25 to 27 50 VDC 24V Nonresettable Normal 21 25 to 27 50 VDC Charger Normal 27 05 to 28 15 VDC Normal 1 3 to 1 6 VDC NACs Open Circuit 2 3 to 2 5 VDC Short Circuit 0 to 1 0 VDC 164 MS 9600LS Series Manual P N 52646 B2 2 12 2010 Read Status Operating Instructions 4 22 4 Trouble Reminder Pressing while viewing Read Status Screen 2 will display the following screen READ STATUS TROUBLE REMINDER TROUBLE REM OH Read Status Screen 2 The screen indicates whether the Trouble Reminder feature is On or Off 4 22 5 Timers Pressing 2 while viewing Read Status Screen 2 will cause the following Timer screens to be dis played TIMERS PAS DELAY PRE SIGNAL WATERFLOW TIMERS AC LOSS DELAY These screens indicate the delay time in
50. Term annunciators are connected ACM Series LED Zone Annunciators e LDM Graphic Annunciator Series QP gt gt e LCD 80F Liquid Crystal Display point annunciator LCD 80FC for Canadian applications e ACM 8RF Relay Module Silence inhibit timer option per NAC Autosilence timer option per NAC Continuous March Time Temporal or California code for main circuit board NACs with two stage capability Selectable strobe synchronization per NAC Remote Acknowledge Alarm Silence Reset and Drill via addressable modules legacy ACS annunciators or ANN 80 Remote annunciator MS 9600LS Series Manual P N 52646 B2 2 12 2010 Specifications Product Description e Auto program learn mode reduces installation time Reports two devices set to the same address e Password and key protected nonvolatile memory User programmable password e Fully programmable from local keypad or keyboard or local PC e Compatible with FiresLite s newer series addressable devices LiteSpeed and CLIP Mode Refer to SLC Wiring Manual for listing of all compatible addressable devices e Compatible with legacy FiresLite s 300 Series devices CLIP Mode only Refer to SLC Wiring Manual for listing of all compatible addressable devices e Optional 4XTMF module conventional reverse polarity city box transmitter e Optional DACT UD2 Digital Alarm Communicator Transmitter reports up to 99 zones or 636 points all devices to a UL listed
51. To Enable or Disable the control module press the key while viewing the Edit Control Screen 2 Each press of the key will toggle the screen between Enabled Yes and Enabled No If Enabled No EDIT CONTROL is selected the module will not be polled by the control panel preventing the module from activat ah ing its output devices The control panel will indicate a system trouble condition and the Disable 3 SILENCEABLE LED will turn on if any devices are disabled Edit Control Screen 2 Type To select the type of control module being programmed press the 2 key while viewing the Edit Control Screen 2 This will cause the control panel to display the following Control Type Screens Press the down arrow key to view additional screens and selections CONTROL TYPE 1 BLANK 2 BELL CIRCUIT S HORH CIRCUIT Control Type Screen 1 While viewing one of the Control Type screens select the type of control module being pro grammed by pressing the corresponding keypad number key The display will return to the Edit Control Screen 2 and indicate the new type selection NOTE Acontrol relay module set to the Resettable Power type will follow the main circuit board 24 VDC resettable power unless the control relay module is disabled MS 9600LS Series Manual P N 52646 B2 2 12 2010 89 Programming Master Programming Level EDIT CONTROL 1 ENABLED 2 TYPE 3 SILENCEABLE Edit Control Screen 2 EDIT CONTROL 1 WALKTEST 2
52. Waterflow Silenceable This option provides the ability to silence any output circuit activated by a monitor module programmed as a waterflow type MS 9600LS Series Manual P N 52646 B2 2 12 2010 Master Programming Level Programming Pressing 2 for System Setup while viewing Programming Screen 2 will cause the following 1 L00P SETUP i SE YSTEM SETUP screens to be displayed S VERIFY LOOPS SYSTEM SETUP i 1 TROUBLE REM OFF Programming Screen 2 2 BANHER 3 TIME DATE System Setup Screen 1 SYSTEM SETUP 1 TIMERS 2 HAC S RELAYS System Setup Screen 2 SYSTEM SETUP 1 CAMADIAN OPT OFF 2Z WATERFLOW SIL HO System Setup Screen 3 Trouble Reminder The Trouble Reminder features causes the control panel piezo to sound a reminder beep for alarms and troubles after the panel has been silenced Refer to System Setup on page 100 for a detailed description of this feature Pressing while viewing System Setup Screen 1 will cause the display to toggle to Trouble Rem On which enables this feature Each press of the key will cause the display to toggle between Trouble Rem On and Trouble Rem Off Banner The top line of the display which appears when the control panel is in normal mode can be changed by using the Banner option Pressing 2 while viewing System Setup Screen 1 will cause the following to be displayed BANHER 1 FACTOR Y 2 USER DEFINED Banner Screen MS 9600LS
53. Z0NE ASSIGNMENT 1515 Edit Control Screen 3 90 The following table contains control module type codes and their functions which are displayed in the Control Type screens Control Type Special Function Bell Circuit NAC Type supervised Horn Circuit NAC Type supervised Sounders NAC Type supervised Relay Ignore Open Circuit Strobe Circuit NAC Type supervised Control NAC Type supervised Resettable Power Relay Type Ignore Open Circuit HVAC SHUTDN 2 Relay Type Ignore Open Circuit 1 When using a control relay module to supply resettable power to conventional 2 wire smoke detectors the MMF 302 monitor module must be set for smoke conventional operation 2 For HVAC SHUTDN description refer to Control Module Operation on page 198 Silenceable The Silenceable selection allows the programmer to select whether output devices connected to the control module can be silenced either by pressing the Alarm Silence key or by enabling Autosi lence Pressing the 3 key while viewing Edit Control Screen 2 will enable the Silenceable feature causing the display to read Silenceable Yes Repeated presses of the 3 key will cause the display to toggle between Silenceable Yes and Silenceable No Note that nonsilenceable outputs will not be activated for Fire Drill Walktest The Walktest feature allows one person to test the system devices without the necessity of man
54. Zone 32 on the FACP serves as the All Call zone and will activate all audio panel output circuits The programmer can select which of the five audio messages at the audio panel will play when an FACP input zone goes into alarm refer to Zone Message on page 149 The message will play over the corresponding audio panel output circuit MS 9600LS Series Manual P N 52646 B2 2 12 2010 Accessories Product Description Examples FACP Input programmed to Zone 33 goes into alarm the programmed message for Zone 33 Message 1 2 3 4 or 5 will play over the ACC 25 50ZS Series output circuit 1 which corresponds to FACP Zone 33 FACP Input programmed to Zone 1 and Zone 34 Zone 1 is programmed for a Message 1 2 3 4 or 5 and Zone 34 is programmed for No Message goes into alarm the programmed message for Zone 1 will play over the ACC 25 50ZS Series output circuit 2 which corresponds to FACP Zone 34 e Iftwo or more input zones are active at the same time the highest priority message will turn on Message 1 is highest priority and Message 5 is lowest and play over the corresponding audio panel output circuit s Zone 32 is an All Call zone All audio panel output circuits will turn on if Zone 32 is activated and its programmed message will play or the highest priority message currently being played A fault at the ACC 25 50ZS Series panel will cause the FACP to indicate a System Trouble and the display will indicate a
55. address which has been disabled and will turn on the Trouble LED and Disable LED Edit Detector Screen 2 Type To select the type of detector being programmed press the 2 key while viewing the Edit Detector Screen 2 This will cause the control panel to display the following Detector Type Screens DETECTOR TYPE 1 SMOKE PHOTO 2 USER DEFINED 1 S SMOKE ION Detector Type Screen 1 MS 9600LS Series Manual P N 52646 B2 2 12 2010 71 Programming Master Programming Level Pressing the down arrow key will display additional detector types as indicated in the following table Detector Type Action When Activated Smoke Photo Fire Alarm User Defined 1 same as previous Smoke Photo Smoke lon Fire Alarm User Defined 2 same as previous Smoke lon Heat Detect Fire Alarm User Defined 3 same as previous Heat Detect Smoke DuctP Fire Alarm User Defined 4 same as previous Smoke DuctP Photo w Heat Fire Alarm User Defined 5 same as previous Photo w Heat Duct Superv Supervisory latching User Defined 6 same as previous Superv DuctP Photo SupervAR Supervisory nonlatching works only in LiteSpeed User Defined 7 same as previous Photo SupervAR ADAPT Fire Alarm User Defined 8 same as previous ADAPT Beam Fire Alarm User Defined 9 same as previous Beam While viewing any Detector Type screen select the type of detector being programmed by pressing th
56. battery 19 cable connection 46 charger 18 22 charger capacity 15 charger disable 15 charger external 22 Charging Circuit 15 see also secondary power 15 46 battery box 22 baud rate 134 BB 55F see also battery box 20 22 C cabinet 19 dimensions 44 45 mounting 42 Calculate System Current Draw 175 Calculating the Battery Size 177 Canadian Option 100 113 Central Station Remote Station Reporting 189 CHG 120F see also battery charger 22 see also remote battery charger 15 CHG 75 see also battery charger 22 see also remote battery charger 15 Class A 47 Class B 47 NAC wiring 49 201 Index 202 Classic Loop Interface Protocol 100 CLIP Mode see also Classic Loop Interface Protocol 100 Clock Format 104 Coded Operation 157 Coding NAC 110 coding two stage operation 111 control buttons 150 control module 20 description display 94 display 88 edit 88 enable disable 89 noun 93 noun adjective 91 92 silenceable 90 type 89 type codes 90 Correlations 178 current AC Power 46 availability 17 maximum 17 Current Draw Calculations 176 D DACT 134 DACT UD2 15 functions 52 installation 52 option module installation 52 53 phone lines 54 see also Digital Alarm Communicator Transmitter 21 data see also detector data and sensitivity 157 values 14 Data Entry via computer keyboard 61 via keypad 61 Date setting 103 Daylight Savings Time 104 DC power nonresettable 47 resettable 47 see also auxiliary DC
57. by letter e Ifthe zero key is pressed again with no other intervening key actions and the last character in the field is a number 0 9 the number is incremented by one If the last character is a letter it changes to a 0 If the last character is 9 it goes to 0 The above increment function may be repeated with each press of the zero key As an example the user could quickly enter FLR_3 ROOM _ 305 as follows 1 The cursor is on the first letter of the Adjective field Press the zero key twice to display FLR_3 2 With the cursor on the first letter of the Noun field press the zero key twice to recall the display ROOM _304 The cursor automatically jumps from the first to the last letter of the Noun field MS 9600LS Series Manual P N 52646 B2 2 12 2010 77 Programming Master Programming Level 3 With the cursor on the last letter of the Noun field press the zero key again to increment the room number to 305 4 Press the right arrow key to advance the zone field 5 Select a zone number from 00 to 99 Z00 default zone is the general alarm zone Z01 through Z99 may be selected to link software zones Module Programming POINT PROGRAM Pressing 2 while viewing Point Program Screen 2 will allow the programmer to add delete or SELECT TYPE change the programming of an addressable module The following screen will be displayed by the 1 DETECTOR control panel 2 M DULE Point Program Screen 2 MODULES
58. causes the Alarm Silenced LED to turn on It also sends an alarm silenced message to the printer history file and optional annunciators A subsequent new alarm will resound the system NACs Note that the Alarm Silenced LED is turned off by pressing the Reset key the Drill key or subsequent activation of the NACs 4 1 3 Drill Hold 2 Sec When the Drill key is held for a minimum of two seconds time required to prevent accidental acti vations the FACP turns on all main panel NAC outputs and all silenceable circuits such as control modules that are programmed as silenceable and turns off the Alarm Silenced LED if it was previ ously on The EVAC IN SYSTEM message is shown on the LCD display The same message is sent to the printer and history file The Alarm Silence key can be used to turn off all silenceable NAC outputs following activation by the Drill key 4 1 4 Reset Pressing and releasing the Reset key turns off all control modules and NACs temporarily turns off resettable power to 4 wire detectors causes a RESET IN SYSTEM message to be displayed on the LCD and sends the same message to the printer and history file It also performs a lamp test by turning on all LEDs except the Ground LED piezo sounder and LCD display segments after the Reset key is released Any alarm or trouble that exists after a reset will resound the system 4 2 LED Indicators 150 The nine LED indicators which are located on the front panel operate a
59. center of the main circuit board The MS 9600UDLS E is provided with a factory installed DACT UD2 Refer to DACT UD2 Installation on page 52 and to the DACT UD2 manual which is included with the FACP for DACT UD2 wiring and programming information IPDACT Internet Protocol DACT The IPDACT is a compact Internet Protocol Digital Alarm Communicator Transmitter designed to allow FACP status communication to a Central Station via the internet No telephone lines are required when using the IPDACT Using Contact ID protocol from the FACP the IPDACT con verts the standard DACT phone communication to a protocol that can be transmitted and received via the internet It also checks connectivity between the FACP and Central Station Refer to the IPDACT Product Installation Document P N 53109 for additional information 1 8 Accessories 1 8 1 PS Tools Programming Utility The PS Tools Programming Utility can be used to locally or remotely program the FACP directly from most IBM compatible computers PC running Windows XP or newer FACP program files can also be created and stored on the PC and then downloaded later to the control panel The P N PK CD Kit includes the FACP Windows based Programming Utility software on CD ROM with on line help file A standard USB cable with male A to male B connectors which must be purchased separately is required by the MS 9600UDLS for local connection of the PC to the USB port J4 on the DACT UD2 The M
60. directly to 2nd stage coding output All other NACs not directly mapped to the activated alarm point s zone but assigned to Zone 0 will activate with a Ist stage output 3 If after the programmed time of 3 or 5 minutes the Acknowledge switch has not been pressed all NACs presently in Ist stage activation will go to 2nd stage activation 4 Ifan Acknowledge switch has been pressed any NACs currently in 1st stage activation will remain in 1st stage Pressing the Acknowledge switch does not affect NACs already in 2nd stage activation 5 Ifanother alarm point is activated and the countdown timer is counting the alarm point will have no effect on the NACs unless the alarm point s zones are directly mapped to one of the NACs in which case it will follow the procedure outlined in step 2 6 If another alarm point is activated and the countdown timer has stopped counting due to the Acknowledge switch being pressed the countdown timer will restart and the NACs will respond as outlined in step 2 NACs already in 2nd stage activation will not be affected 7 Any control modules assigned to special Zone 99 will be activated either by direct mapping of an input device programmed to Zone 99 or if the timer counts down to zero and the NAC goes into 2nd stage coding 8 Control modules that are programmed to the same zone as the activated input device will not be delayed for activation m Zone A maximum of five zones can be programmed to each ma
61. display the remaining relays for this module To program any of the ANN RLY relays while viewing the appropriate ANN RLY Option screen press the number key corresponding to the relay to be programmed Following is a list of the avail able programming options for each relay Alarm Supervisory Supervisory AR e Trouble Comm Fail e Process Mon e Process Mon AR e AC Loss Hazard e Medical e Silenceable Alarm Zone Active XX Auto Configure A ENE The ANN BUS Auto Configure features allows the programmer to quickly bring all installed WN ENABLED 2 0PTIONS INSTALLED ANN BUS modules online The software will search for all ANN BUS modules and automatically program the device type and address into the system The ANN BUS must be enabled for the Auto ANN BUS Screen 1 Configure feature to work l l Pressing 3 while viewing ANN BUS Screen 1 will begin the Auto Configure process and cause the following screen to be displayed 3 AUTO CONFIGURE ANH BUS AUTO CONGFIGURE IN PROGRESS PLEASE WAIT Auto Configure Screen MS 9600LS Series Manual P N 52646 B2 2 12 2010 131 Programming Master Programming Level ANN S PG Print Options Micros OPTIONS The Print option allows the programmer to configure the optional printer Pressing 1 while viewing 2 ANN 86 OPTIONS ANN BUS screen 2 will display the following screens ANN BUS Screen 2 ANN S PG OPTIONS y 1 PORT PAR 2 PRINTER SUPY HO S OFFL
62. ee eh ee 1 ELEWATOR 1 GARAGE 2 ENTRANCE 2 HALLWAY 3 FLOOR S HVAC RM Noun Screen 3 Noun Screen 4 See tt 1 KITCHEH 2 LUBBY 3 0F FICE EEE FEA EEE 1 PATIENT 2 RESTROOM 3 RO00M Noun Screen 5 Noun Screen 6 SESE EEE EEE EEE EEE Et SESE EEE EEE EE EE Et 1 STAIRWAY 1 2DHE 2 STOREROOM S WING Noun Screen 7 Noun Screen 8 76 MS 9600LS Series Manual P N 52646 B2 2 12 2010 Master Programming Level Programming 1 STANDARD ADJECTIVE 2 STANDARD NOUN CUSTOM ADJECTIVE 4 CUSTOM NOUN Noun Adjective Screen 1 NOUN ADJECTIVE 2 DESCRIPTION Edit Detector Screen 5 Pressing 3 or 4 while viewing the Noun Adjective Screen will display screens similar to the previ ous Adjective and Noun Screens The new screens will list custom Adjectives and Nouns which have been programmed into the control panel using the PS Tools programming kit These descrip tors are selected as described in the previous sections Description The Description selection allows the programmer to enter additional information about the detector currently being programmed This information will be displayed as part of the device label on the display Pressing 2 while viewing Edit Detector Screen 5 will cause the following screen to be displayed DESCRIPTION IDB HOUMSADJECTIVE Be te te EEE Adjective Noun Screen A flashing cursor will appear at the first asterisk to the left The programmer can enter additional des
63. illustrated in the following example EDIT DETECTOR 10661 1 ENABLED YES Enable Disable Select Screen Pressing repeatedly will cause the display to toggle between Enabled Yes and Enabled No 3 7 2 History ESAS Pressing 2 while viewing Maintenance Screen 1 will cause the following screen to be displayed 2 HI HISTORY 3 PROGRAM CHECK HISTORY Maintenance Screen 1 L VIEW EVENTS 2 ERASE HISTORY History Screen The History feature allows the operator to view control panel events which have been stored in a history file in memory and erase the contents of the history file Pressing while viewing the History screen will cause the following screen to be displayed HISTORY 1 VIEW ALL 2 VIEW ALARMS S VIEW OTHER EVENTS Events Screen To view all the events which have occurred in the control panel since the history file was last erased press while viewing the Events screen To view only alarms which have occurred press 2 while viewing the Events screen To view events other than alarms press 3 The most recent event will be displayed on the screen To view all of the selected events press the up or down arrow keys to scroll through the list of events If no events have occurred the display will read NO EVENTS IN HISTORY 140 MS 9600LS Series Manual P N 52646 B2 2 12 2010 Maintenance Programming Level Programming Pressing 2 while viewing the History Screen will cause the following screen to be di
64. in the Programming Zone Assignment Screen an output device con MS 9600LS Series Manual P N 52646 B2 2 12 2010 145 Programming Maintenance Programming Level ZONE SETUP 1 ZONES INSTALLED 2 Z0NES ENABLED 3 Z0NES DISABLED Zone Setup Screen 2 146 nected to the control module can be used to indicate a PAS condition in the control panel Do not assign Zone 97 to a Notification Appliance Circuit when using this zone to indicate a PAS condi tion Pressing 2 will cause the display to change to Pre signal 98 On Each press of the 2 key will cause the display to toggle between Pre signal 98 On and Pre signal 98 Off When Zone 98 is pro grammed On a Pre signal activation of any device will cause Zone 98 to activate By assigning Zone 98 to a control module in the Programming Zone Assignment Screen an output device con nected to the control module can be used to indicate a Pre signal condition in the control panel Do not assign Zone 98 to a Notification Appliance Circuit when using this zone to indicate a Pre signal condition Zone 99 in special purpose mode is reserved for future use and has no effect Zones Installed Pressing 1 for Zones Installed while viewing Zone Setup Screen 2 will display a screen similar to the following ONES INSTALLED 66 61 62 63 B4 BS Zones Installed Screen This display will show all of the zones that have been programmed into the control panel Note that an up and or down arro
65. including a 16 key alpha numeric pad similar to a telephone keypad Function keys e Acknowledge Step AC POWER MANTENANCE Alarm Silence gt O e Reset lamp test E EJ Service program keys a A oe Keys labeled 1 to 9 DRILL E key 4 2 E 3 y 5 key T5 mua f e 0 recall key a Ist Event key Figure 1 2 Membrane Display Panel e Clear key Escape key e Mode key Four cursor keys up down left and right Enter key Local Piezo Sounder A piezo sounder provides separate and distinct pulse rates for alarm trouble and supervisory condi tions 1 5 Circuits SLC Communication Loop One SLC loop is provided standard on the FACP main circuit board A second SLC loop is avail able by plugging the optional SLC module into connector J3 on the main circuit board SLC loops configurable for NFPA Style 4 6 or 7 provide communication to addressable detectors monitor initiating device and control output device modules Refer to the SLC Wiring Manual for infor mation on wiring devices Output Circuits The following output circuits are available on the FACP e Special Application Power e 24 VDC Resettable smoke detector power output 1 5 amps maximum e 24 VDC Nonresettable power output 1 1 5 amps maximum e 24 VDC Nonresettable power output 2 1 5 amps maximum e 24 VDC Battery Charger up to 26 AH batteries MS 9600LS Series Manual P N 52646 B2 2 12 2010 Components Product D
66. loop must be pro grammed to operate in CLIP mode Refer to the SLC Wiring Manual for a complete list of compat ible addressable modules Refer to the Device Compatibility Document for a list of approved notification and initiating devices 1 6 3 300 Series Intelligent Addressable Devices Fire Lite s 300 Series Intelligent Addressable Devices are fully compatible with the MS 9600LS FACP The FACP must be configured for CLIP Mode operation if the control panel is installed in an existing system with 300 Series devices The address of 300 Series devices cannot be set above 99 Refer to the SLC Wiring Manual for a complete list of compatible addressable devices 1 6 4 Addressable Device Accessories End of Line Resistor Assembly P N R 47K The 47 KQ End of Line Resistor assembly P N R 47K is used to supervise the MMF 300 MDF 300 MMF 301 and CMF 300 module circuits The 3 9 KQ End of Line Resistor assembly is used to supervise the MMF 302 module circuit The resistors are included with each module Power Supervision Relay The UL listed End of Line power supervision relay P N EOLR 1 is used to supervise the power to 4 wire smoke detectors and notification appliances 20 MS 9600LS Series Manual P N 52646 B2 2 12 2010 Optional Modules Product Description N ELR Mounting Plate The N ELR is a single End of Line resistor plate which is required for use in Canada An ELR which is supplied with each module and fire alarm control p
67. of Fire Alarm Systems rd 3 El Ce eee reeceecece CAN ULC S527 99 Standard for Control Units for Fire Alarm Systems CAN ULC S559 04 Equipment for Fire Signal Receiving Centers and Systems CAN ULC S561 03 Installation and Services for Fire Signal Receiving Centers and Systems Note MS 9600LSE MS 9600UDLSE is not ULC listed for Canadian applications This Class A digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES 003 Cet appareil num rique de la classe A est conforme a la norme NMB 003 du Canada FM Approved to ANSI UL 864 Other EIA 232E Serial Interface Standard E A 485 Serial Interface Standard NEC Article 250 Grounding NEC Article 300 Wiring Methods NEC Article 760 Fire Protective Signaling Systems Applicable Local and State Building Codes Requirements of the Local Authority Having Jurisdiction LAHJ Fire Lite Documents APPROVED Fire Lite Device Compatibility Document 15384 SLC Wiring Manual Document 51309 ACS Series Annunciators Document 51480 411UD Communicator Transmitter Document 50759 411UDAC Communicator Transmitter Document 51073 CHG 120F Battery Charger Document 50888 CHG 75 Battery Charger Document 51315 LDM Series Lamp Driver Modules Document 50055 LCD 80F Remote Fire Annunciator Document 51338 ACM 8RF Relay Control Module Document 50362 DACT UD2 Manual Document 53037 IDACT Communicator Transmitter Document 53109 ANN 80 Installation Document Document 52749 ANN R LED Installat
68. on the control panel Pressing for Zone Types while viewing Zone Setup Screen 3 will display a screen similar to the following OHNE TYPE PROG 1 266 MONITOR 2 261 MONITOR 3 262 MONITOR Zones Installed Screen This display will show the system zones default and user programmed and their associated types Note that an up and or down arrow will appear in the upper right corner of the display indicating that additional screens of zone information exists Press the up or down arrow keys to view zones Z00 through 299 MS 9600LS Series Manual P N 52646 B2 2 12 2010 147 Programming Maintenance Programming Level Zone types can be changed by pressing the keypad number key corresponding to the zone in each Zones Installed Screen Available zone types will be displayed in the resultant screens For exam ple to change the zone type for zone Z02 in the screen illustrated above press 3 The following screens will be displayed ONE TYPE PROG ONE TYPE PROG 1 MONITOR 1 HEAT Z SMOKE PHOTO 2 P ULL STATION S WATERFLOW S DUCT Zone Type Program Screen 1 Zone Type Program Screen 2 OHNE TYPE PROG ZONE TYPE PROG 1 MEDICAL 1 SUPERVISORY 2 HAZARD 2 PROC MON 3 TAMPER 3 5MOKE IDH ZONE SETUP 1 Z0H Zone Type Program Screen 3 Zone Type Program Screen 4 To change the zone type for Z02 to Pull Station scroll the display until Zone Type Program Screen 2 is displayed Press 2 to program zone Z02 as a Pull Sta
69. process moni toring or remote switches Presignal operation requires the approval of the local Authority Having Jurisdiction 4 19 Positive Alarm Sequence 158 PAS Positive Alarm Sequence option will program a smoke detector to delay panel activation including alarm relay and communicator for a period of 15 seconds Zone 97 however will acti vate immediately and may be used to connect a signaling device to indicate PAS activation Do not assign Zone 97 to a Notification Appliance Circuit when using this zone to indicate a PAS condi tion When a detector triggers an alarm the onboard piezo sounds immediately but the NACs are pre vented from activating for 15 seconds This inhibit time is factory set and cannot be changed Pressing the Alarm Silence or Acknowledge Step key during the 15 second inhibit time will silence the piezo sounder and start a timer which prevents activation of NACs for an additional time dura tion which can be user programmed for up to three minutes After the programmed delay the NACs will activate if the source of the alarm is not cleared Note that if a second alarm occurs dur ing either time delay the alarm will be processed immediately causing activation of the appropriate output zones The events which occur upon PAS activation are as follows onboard piezo sounds immediately e control panel LCD display will indicate a presignal event and the active point control points programmed to Zone 97 will ac
70. resistance 55 current 55 installation 55 installation steps 56 see also Transmitter Module 15 21 voltage 55 A AC Branch Circuit calculations 174 AC Loss Delay 106 AC Power 46 current 15 current maximum 46 voltage 15 wiring 15 46 Acknowledge Step 18 150 ACM LED annunciator 60 ACM Series see also annunciator 40 ACM 16ATF Annunciator 40 ACM 32AF Annunciator 40 ACM 8RF 14 contact rating 59 see also Relay Control Module 59 ACS LED annunciator 14 add Detector 67 add Module 78 address range 20 addressable 13 addressable detectors see also detectors 15 Addressable Device Accessories 20 addressable modules 20 see also modules 15 addressing annunciators 120 see also device addressing 100 see also module or detector addressing 20 Adjective control module 92 monitor module 85 multiple entries 77 Adjective list 75 AEM 16ATF Annunciator 40 AEM 32AF Annunciator 40 Alarm 153 Alarm Silence 18 150 alarm verification 14 72 157 159 MS 9600LS Series Manual P N 52646 B2 2 12 2010 ANN RLY Annunciator Module 36 ANN SB80KIT Mounting Kit 28 annunciator 40 ACM 14 120 ACM 8RF 14 graphic see also LDM Series 14 40 annunciator addressing 120 annunciator remote see also LCD 80F 40 Auto Silence NAC 110 Automatic Test Operation 156 Autoprogramming 15 62 66 Autosilence 14 159 auxiliary DC power 47 Auxiliary Trouble Input 19 57 B backbox 19 see also cabinet 45 Banner 100 Banner setting 101
71. sensitivity measurements required by NFPA Standard 72 The FACP software also provides filters to remove transient noise signals usually caused by elec trical interference Maintenance Alert The software determines when the drift compensation for a detector reaches an unacceptable level that can compromise detector performance When a detector reaches an unacceptable level the control panel indicates a maintenance alert Table 4 1 summarizes the three levels of maintenance alert Maintenance Level FACP Status Displays Indicates Low Chamber Value IHWREP A hardware problem in the detector Maintenance Alert DIRT 1 Dust accumulation that is near but below the allowed limit DIRTY 1 indicates the need for maintenance before the performance of the detector is compromised Maintenance Urgent DIRTY Z Dust accumulation above the allowed limit Table 4 1 Maintenance Alert Levels Figure 4 1 illustrates a graphic representation of the maintenance levels DIRTY Maintenance Urgent _ Ah Maintenance e Alert Acceptable Range LowChamber Y Reading gt LOW VALUE Figure 4 1 Diagram of Maintenance Levels MS 9600LS Series Manual P N 52646 B2 2 12 2010 Read Status Operating Instructions 4 22 16 Time Date The operator can view the daylight savings time and the month and week when daylight savings time will begin and end Pressing while viewing Read Status Screen 6 will disp
72. software zones Up to four onboard NACs Notification Appliance Circuits four Style Y Class B or two Style Z Class A Additional NAC capability using control modules 7 0 amps total power for NACs and 24 VDC auxiliary power outputs in alarm Two programmable relay outputs and one fixed trouble relay EIA 232 Printer PC interface variable baud rate 80 character LCD display backlit Real time clock calendar with daylight savings time control History file with 1 000 event capacity Advanced fire technology features e Automatic drift compensation e Maintenance alert e Detector sensitivity test capability NFPA 72 compliant e Automatic device type code verification e Point trouble identification Waterflow selection per module point Alarm verification selection per detector point Walktest silent or audible PAS Positive Alarm Sequence and Pre signal per point NFPA 72 compliant New ANN BUS Annunciators Modules ACS annunciators cannot be used when ANN BUS annunciators modules are connected e ANN 80 Remote Liquid Crystal Display point annunciator ANN I O LED Driver Module NN LED Alarm Trouble Supervisory Annunciator minimum of one required for anadian applications NN RLED Alarm Annunciator NN S PG Serial Parallel Printer Module ANN RLY Form C Relay Module e Automated activation of the ACC 25 50 ZS T Audio Command Center Legacy ACS Term Annunciators ANN BUS annunciator modules cannot be used when ACS
73. stud as indicated in Figure 2 1 e When the location is dry and free of construction dust install the main circuit board chassis by positioning the two mounting tab holes on the top of the chassis over the mounting studs in the top of the backbox and sliding the mounting tabs at the bottom of the chassis into the mounting slots in the bottom of the backbox as illustrated below e Secure the chassis to the mounting studs with the supplied nuts MS 9600LS Series Manual P N 52646 B2 2 12 2010 Mounting Installation Main Circuit Board on Chassis mounting tab dis a ln O mounting studs grounding stud B gt attach solid earth aaron baal to mounting slots ower an Earth Ground Connection on Ho page 46 m FACP Backbox 9600Isbrdinbox wmf Figure 2 1 FACP Main Circuit Board Installation MS 9600LS Series Manual P N 52646 B2 2 12 2010 43 Installation Mounting 3 37 cm 5 1 cm i 13 37 cm el 32534 2 00 p14 2 00 4 2 00 94 2 00 942 007 2 0091 2 0091 328 T 1 625 4 128 ch eis Semi Flush Mounting a T Do not recess box r more than 3 875 into Hinge Slot for wall to avoid cove
74. voltage drop 15 voltage operating 15 wiring Style 47 NAC enable disable 108 NAC options 100 NAC type 109 NACKEY card 48 N ELR Mounting Plate 21 NFPA 72 Auxiliary Fire Alarm System 187 190 NFPA 72 Central Station Service Protected Premises Unit or Remote Station Service 187 NFPA 72 Proprietary Fire Alarm System 187 NFPA 72 Proprietary Protective Signaling Sys tems 192 NFPA 72 Remote Station Protective Signaling System 191 NFPA Battery Requirements 177 NFPA Signaling Systems for Central Station Ser vice Protected Premises Unit Remote Station 188 NFPA Standard 187 Nonresettable Power 18 47 current 16 47 nonsilenceable waterflow 114 148 nonsilenceable waterflow 98 normal display 62 151 Notification Appliance Circuit 15 107 see also NAC 14 47 Noun monitor module 86 multiple entries 77 Noun list 76 Noun Adjective 74 76 control module 91 monitor module 84 O Operating Instructions 150 Operation alarm 153 disable enable 156 hazard condition 155 medical alert 156 NAC 157 normal 151 process monitor 155 programmed zone 156 supervisory 154 trouble 152 waterflow 156 Option Modules 21 51 117 annunciators UDACT 118 Printer PC 134 Options 13 Output Circuits 18 P PAS 72 96 158 see also Positive Alarm Sequence 14 72 PAS BYPASS 159 PAS timer 105 Password 15 63 change 135 Maintenance Level 2 64 138 Master Level 1 64 PC personal computer configuration 59 connection 58 ground fault 59
75. will read as follows PROGRAMMING ENTER PASSWORD err Entering the Master level password default 00000 will cause the following screen to appear PROGRAMMING 1 RAUTOPROGRAM 2 POINT PROGRAM S Z0NE SETUP If the Maintenance level password default 11111 is entered the following screen will appear PROGRAMMING 1 POINT PROGRAM 2 HISTORY S PROGRAM CHECK Note that in the two preceding screens an arrow appears to inform the programmer that additional options can be viewed by pressing the keypad down arrow key 64 MS 9600LS Series Manual P N 52646 B2 2 12 2010 Master Programming Level Programming 3 6 Master Programming Level When the Master Program Level password is entered the control panel will enter user Program ming mode In this mode the piezo sounder remains off the trouble relay is activated and the sys tem Trouble LED flashes until Programming mode is exited The following display will appear PROGRAMMING 1 AUTOPROGRAM 2 POINT PROGRAM S Z0NE SETUP Programming Screen 1 The down arrow which appears in the display indicates that additional programming choices can be viewed by pressing the down arrow key on the keypad If a down and up arrow appear in the dis play pressing the down arrow key will display the subsequent Programming Screens as illustrated below while pressing the up arrow key will display the previous screen PROGRAMMING 1 LO0P SETUP 2 SYSTEM SETUP S V
76. 018 X 0 002 LCD 80F amp LCD 80FC X 0 064 X 0 064 X 0 025 4XTMF X 0 005 De X 0 011 X 0 005 4 wire Detector Heads XL P X EF X J Power Supervision Relays Xf0 02 o o TI I XRO LT XIO2B o amp SLC 2LS Expander X 0 02500 X 0 02600 X 0 01900 CP350 8 CP355 X 0 00030 X 0 00030 SD350 8 SD355 X 0 00030 X 0 00030 SD350T 8 SD355T X 0 00030 X 0 00030 AD350 8 AD355 X 0 00030 X 0 00030 H350 8 H355 X 0 00030 X 0 00030 H350R 8 H355R X 0 00030 X 0 00030 H355HT X 0 00030 X 0 00030 D350P 8 D350PL X 0 00030 X 0 00030 D350RP 8 D350RPL X 0 00030 X 0 00030 BBR BS018HT7 11 ooe a X 0 001 B224RB Relay Base X 0 00050 for all devices X 0 00050 B224BI Isolator Base X 0 00045 X 0 00045 MMF 300 X 0 00040 with one 1 SLC Loop 0 400 X 0 00040 MMF 300 10 X 0 00350 X 0 00350 MDF 300 X 0 00075 with two 2 SLC Loops 0 800 X 0 00075 MMF 301 X 0 000375 X 0 000375 MMF 302 X 0 00027 X 0 00027 MMF 302 6 X 0 00200 X 0 00200 BG 12LX X 0 00030 X 0 00030 CMF 300 X 0 00039 X 0 00039 CMF 300 6 X 0 00225 X 0 00225 CRF 300 X 0 00027 X 0 00027 CRF 300 6 X 0 00145 X 0 00145 1300 X 0 00040 X 0 00040 1 f 1 o Current Draw from TB3 FF EF nonalarm com eag column for Primary Non Alarm Primary Alarm Secondary Non Alarm Table 5 3 System Current Draw Calculations 1 All eight ACM 8RF relays activated on a single modul
77. 16 4 02 14 2 54 Exception When using the ANN RLY module the installer must ensure that the maximum 24VDC power line drop does not exceed 0 3 volts This results in the following wiring limitations Wire Gauge Maximum Wire Length 18 312 feet 16 497 feet 14 787 feet 12 1 250 feet Wiring Distance Calculation Example Suppose a system is configured with the following ANN BUS modules e 3 ANN 80 Remote Fire Annunciators e 1 ANN S PG Serial Parallel Printer Interface Module 1 ANN I O LED Driver Module 24 MS 9600LS Series Manual P N 52646 B2 2 12 2010 Accessories Product Description The total worst case current is calculated as follows ANN 80 Current Draw 3 X 0 040 amps 0 120 amps ANN S PG Current Draw 1 X 0 040 amps 0 040 amps ANN I O Current Draw 1 X 0 200 amps 0 200 amps Total Worst Case Current Draw 0 360 amp Using this value and referring to the Wiring Distance Table 1 1 on page 24 it can be found that the available options are 463 feet maximum using 22 Gauge wire 1 172 feet maximum using 18 Gauge wire e 1 866 feet maximum using 16 Gauge wire 2 953 feet maximum using 14 Gauge wire m Wiring Configuration Figure 1 3 illustrates the wiring between the FACP and ANN BUS devices ANN BUS and power wiring are supervised and power limited mm hil o TB1 E BUS ANN BUS 5 ANN BUS Device 24 VDC Aes BU E no
78. 2001 SMOKE PHOTO 20 1310 12 02AM 01 08 2001 Chamber Value The Chamber value should be within the indicated range for the following smoke detectors SD350 T SD355 T D350P R SD300 T AD350 and AD355 Addressable Photoelectric Smoke Detectors 405 2100 obscuration of 1 00 ft to 3 66 ft e CP350 CP355 and CP300 Addressable Ionization Smoke Detectors 750 2100 obscuration of 0 50 ft to 1 44 ft If the addressable smoke detector s Chamber reading is not within the acceptable range clean the detector and check the Chamber value again If the reading is still not within the acceptable range immediately replace the detector MS 9600LS Series Manual P N 52646 B2 2 12 2010 171 Operating Instructions Read Status 172 Drift Compensation Drift compensation uses software algorithms that identify and compensate for long term changes in the data readings from each addressable smoke detector These long term changes in detector data readings are typically caused by dirt and dust accumulation inside the smoke chamber Drift com pensation performs the following functions Samples each photoelectric smoke detector every 6 seconds and each ionization smoke detector every 3 seconds e Allows a smoke detector to retain its original ability to detect actual smoke and resist false alarms even as dirt and dust accumulate e Reduces maintenance requirements by allowing the control panel to automatically perform the periodic
79. 3 484 7161 fax 203 484 7118 www firelite com iSO 9001
80. 5 Maintenance Level 144 zone type 98 147 list 98 148 Zone Z97 73 Zone Z98 pre signal zone 73 Zones 163 178 see also software zones 14 Zones Disabled 97 147 Zones Enabled 97 146 Zones Installed 97 146 zones per device 73 MS 9600LS Series Manual P N 52646 B2 2 12 2010 Manufacturer Warranties and Limitation of Liability Manufacturer Warranties Subject to the limitations set forth herein Manufacturer warrants that the Products manufactured by it in its Northford Connecticut facility and sold by it to its authorized Distributors shall be free under normal use and service from defects in material and workmanship for a period of thirty six months 36 months from the date of manufacture effective Jan 1 2009 The Products manufactured and sold by Manufacturer are date stamped at the time of production Manufacturer does not warrant Products that are not manufactured by it in its Northford Connecticut facility but assigns to its Distributor to the extent possible any warranty offered by the manufacturer of such product This warranty shall be void if a Product is altered serviced or repaired by anyone other than Manufacturer or its authorized Distributors This warranty shall also be void if there is a failure to maintain the Products and the systems in which they operate in proper working conditions MANUFACTURER MAKES NO FURTHER WARRANTIES AND DISCLAIMS ANY AND ALL OTHER WARRANTIES EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WITH RES
81. 75 26 76 27 77 28 78 29 79 30 80 31 81 32 82 33 83 34 84 35 85 36 86 37 87 38 88 39 89 40 90 41 91 42 92 43 93 44 94 45 95 46 96 47 97 48 98 49 99 50 100 Table A 3 Blank Detector Programming Sheet 1 of 2 182 MS 9600LS Series Manual P N 52646 B2 2 12 2010 Correlations Software Zones DETECTOR ZONE ASSIGNMENT Address Device Type Zone Number ADJ NOUN Address Device Type Zone Number ADJ NOUN 101 151 102 152 103 153 104 105 106 154 155 156 107 157 108 158 109 159 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 Table A 4 Blank Detector Programming Sheet 2 of 2 MS 9600LS Series Manual P N 52646 B2 2 12 2010 183 Software Zones Correlations MONITOR CONTROL MODULE ZONE ASSIGNMENT Address Device Zone ADJ NOUN Address Device Zone ADJ NOUN Type Number Type Number 01 51
82. 8 MS 9600LS Series Manual P N 52646 B2 2 12 2010 Optional Modules and Devices Installation installation details Refer to ANN BUS Options on page 121 for programming information A CAUTION POSSIBLE EQUIPMENT DAMAGE DO NOT CONNECT A PRINTER OR PC TO THE FACP IF A GROUND FAULT ZERO IMPED ANCE TO GROUND EXISTS ON THE CONTROL PANEL CIRCUIT DAMAGE MAY RESULT REMOVE ALL POWER AC AND DC BEFORE INSTALLING OR REMOVING ANY WIRING Installation Remote printers and PCs require separate primary power Also required is the PRT PK CABLE which is an interface cable prewired to a DB9F connector Wire the PRT PK CABLE to TB7 Ter minals 4 as illustrated in the following figure Connect the DB9F connector to the printer or PC serial E A 232 port If a nine pin serial connector is not available on the printer or PC use a DB25 adapter Make certain that the DB25 adapter does not swap the Transmit and Receive lines Apply power to the FACP and printer or PC Note that a ground fault zero impedance to ground may occur on the FACP dependent on the printer or PC being used due to this connection For this rea son it is important that there be no preexisting ground fault on the panel Note that the printer may or may not be supervised as determined by user programming Refer to Printer PC on page 134 PRT PK CABLE Black 1x gt Rov gt DTR gt GRND gt Rs 232 Pci XMT 9600tb7a wmf
83. AC3 and NAC4 will display asterisks and will not be included in the test MS 9600LS Series Manual P N 52646 B2 2 12 2010 141 Programming Maintenance Programming Level Pressing 2 while viewing the Program Check screen will display a screen similar to the following ZONES HO INPUT 65 6 69 16 11 1M661 The Zone No Input screen allows the programmer to view the zones which have not been pro grammed to at least one input device not including general alarm Zone 00 The example in the preceding screen indicates that Zones 05 07 09 10 and 11 have been programmed to an address able module control module in this example with an address of 001 on loop 1 but have not been programmed to any input devices Use the up and down arrow keys to view all the zones without input assignments Pressing 3 while viewing Program Check screen will cause a screen similar to the following to be displayed ONES HO OUTPUT 65 6 69 16 11 10661 The Zone No Output feature allows the programmer to view the zones which have not been pro grammed to at least one output device not including general alarm Zone 00 The example in the preceding screen indicates that Zones 05 07 09 10 and 11 have been programmed to an address able detector with an address of 001 on loop 1 but have not been programmed to any output devices Use the up and down arrow keys to view all the zones without output assignments 3 7 4 Walktest PROGRAMMING 1 WALKTES
84. ACP main circuit board SEC Secondary Phone Line _pae J5 Connector located on back of module plugs into J2 on FACP main circuit board AYWaINOI3S AYVINIAd J2 ee O J1 O J4 PRI Primary Phone Line DIALX wmf Figure 2 11 DACT UD2 Module MS 9600LS Series Manual P N 52646 B2 2 12 2010 Optional Modules and Devices Installation The following steps must be followed when installing the DACT UD2 module Remove all power AC and DC from FACP before proceeding with installation Remove all main circuit board mounting screws 6 locations and the 4XTMF module standoffs 2 locations unplug the power supply cable from J1 and lift the main circuit board assembly off the chassis refer to Figure 2 10 Remove the Keypad Display from the main circuit board as described in the beginning of this section Remove and discard the Keypad Display support standoff that presently occupies DACT UD2 standoff location 3 refer to Figure 2 12 Install the supplied DACT UD2 female female standoffs in the three locations shown in Figure 2 12 and secure with the three supplied screws inserted from the bottom side of the main circuit board Be sure to tighten them fully Carefully plug connector J5 on back of the DACT UD2 module into connector J2 on the FACP main circuit board being careful not to bend any pins Align the mounting holes in the DACT UD2 mod
85. ANN T O module depend on the programming options selected as far as which SLC loop and the device type detector or module to be annunciated The LED assignments for each ANN I O module will be as follows ANN I O ANN I O ANN I O ANN I O ANN I O Module LED Module 1 Module 2 Module 3 Module 4 Module 5 Function Function Function Function Function 1 AC Fault Point 31 Point 71 Point 111 Point 151 2 Fire Alarm Point 32 Point 72 Point 112 Point 152 3 Supervisory Point 33 Point 73 Point 113 Point 153 4 Trouble Point 34 Point 74 Point 114 Point 154 5 Alarm Silenced Point 35 Point 75 Point 115 Point 155 6 Earth Fault Point 36 Point 76 Point 116 Point 156 7 Battery Fault Point 37 Point 77 Point 117 Point 157 8 Charger Fault Point 38 Point 78 Point 118 Point 158 9 NAC Fault Point 39 Point 79 Point 119 Point 159 10 Disabled Point 40 Point 80 Point 120 Not Used 11 Point 01 Point 41 Point 81 Point 121 Not Used 12 Point 02 Point 42 Point 82 Point 122 Not Used 13 Point 03 Point 43 Point 83 Point 123 Not Used 14 Point 04 Point 44 Point 84 Point 124 Not Used 15 Point 05 Point 45 Point 85 Point 125 Not Used 16 Point 06 Point 46 Point 86 Point 126 Not Used 17 Point 07 Point 47 Point 87 Point 127 Not Used 18 Point 08 Point 48 Point 88 Point 128 Not Used 19 Point 09 Point 49 Point 89 Point 129 Not Used 20 Point 10 Point 50 Point 90
86. ASE WAIT Autoprogram Progress Screen When Autoprogramming is completed the control panel will display the type and quantity of each device installed on the SLC loop s similar to the following display OF DET LOOP1 635 Y OF MON LOOP1 035 Y OF CON LOOP1 636 Autoprogram Result Screen 1 OF DET LOOP B OF MON LOOP 666 OF CON LOOP 606 Autoprogram Result Screen 2 In the preceding example the first display indicates that Loop has 55 addressable detectors 35 monitor modules and 30 control modules installed The second display indicates that Loop 2 has no devices installed 66 MS 9600LS Series Manual P N 52646 B2 2 12 2010 Master Programming Level Programming 3 6 2 Point Program PROGRAMMING 1 AUTOPROGRAM 2 POINT PROGRAM 3 Z0NE SETUP Programming Screen 1 The Point Program option allows the programmer to add a new addressable device to an SLC loop delete an existing device from a loop or change the programming for an existing device Pressing 2 while viewing Programming Screen 1 will select the Point Program option and display the fol lowing screen POINT PROGRAM SELECT LOOP i L00F 1 2 L00P 2 Point Program Screen 1 The programmer selects the desired SLC loop by pressing or 2 in Point Program Screen 1 which causes the panel to display the following screen POINT PROGRAM SELECT TYPE 1 DETECTOR 2 MODULE Point Program Screen 2 Detector Programming P
87. AWG 2 00 mm wire with 600 volt insulation for this branch circuit Use Table 5 1 to determine the total amount of current in AC amperes A that must be supplied to the system Device Type Number of Current Draw Total Current per Devices AC amps Device MS 9600LS C 3 0 MS 9600UDLS or 1 X or MS 9600LSE MS 9600UDLSE 1 5 CHG 120F X 2 0 x Sum Column for AC Branch Current Required Table 5 1 AC Branch Circuit Requirements 5 3 Calculating the System Current Draw 5 3 1 Overview The control panel must be able to power all internal and external devices continuously during the non fire alarm condition To calculate the non fire alarm load on the system power supply when primary power is applied use Calculation Column 1 in Table 5 3 on page 176 The control panel must support a larger load current during a fire alarm condition To calculate the fire alarm load on the power supply use Calculation Column 2 in Table 5 3 on page 176 The secondary power source batteries must be able to power the system during a primary power loss To calculate the non fire alarm load on the secondary power source use Calculation Column 3 in Table 5 3 on page 176 When calculating current draw and the battery size note the following e Primary refers to the main power source for the control panel 174 MS 9600LS Series Manual P N 52646 B2 2 12 2010 Calculating the System Current Draw Powe
88. Alarm Zone 35 Zone 36 Zone 37 Zone 38 Zone 39 Active Alarm Active Alarm Active Alarm Active Alarm Active Alarm Zone 40 Zone 41 Zone 42 Zone 43 Zone 44 Active Alarm Active Alarm Active Alarm Active Alarm Active Alarm Zone 45 Zone 46 Zone 47 Zone 48 Zone 49 Active Alarm Active Alarm Active Alarm Active Alarm Active Alarm Zone 50 Zone 51 Zone 52 Zone 53 Zone 54 Active Alarm Active Alarm Active Alarm Active Alarm Active Alarm Zone 55 Zone 56 Zone 57 Zone 58 Zone 59 Active Alarm Active Alarm Active Alarm Active Alarm Active Alarm ANN RLED Module 2 The LED assignments for the modules annunciating Zone Ranges 60 89 and 90 99 will follow the same pattern as the second ANN RLED module MS 9600LS Series Manual P N 52646 B2 2 12 2010 127 Programming Master Programming Level 128 ANN LED Zone Option Alarm Trouble and Supervisory If Zone is selected as the module option and the module is programmed to annunciate alarms troubles and supervisories the first ten LEDs on the first ANN LED module will display the sys tem status information The remaining 30 LEDs on the first module and the last 30 LEDs on the remaining modules will display the alarm trouble and supervisory status for each of the ten zones in the Zone Range programmed for that particular module The LED assignments for each ANN LED module will be as follows Alarm Silenced NAC 1 Fault NAC 2 Fault NAC 3 Fault NAC 4 Fault Ea
89. Bits Parity and Stop Bits options are only available when the Serial Port option has been selected Pressing for Baud Rate while viewing ANN S PG Options screen 2 will cause a screen to appear which allow the user to select a Baud Rate of 19200 9600 or 2400 Pressing 2 for Data Bits while viewing ANN S PG Options screen 2 will cause a screen to appear which allows the user to select 7 or 8 Data Bits Pressing 3 for Parity while viewing ANN S PG Options screen 2 will cause a screen to appear which allows the user to select between No Parity Even Parity or Odd Parity Pressing for Stop Bits while viewing ANN S PG Options screen 3 will cause a screen to appear which allows the user to select between 1 0 or 2 0 Stop Bits 132 MS 9600LS Series Manual P N 52646 B2 2 12 2010 Master Programming Level Programming ANN 80 Options es OPTIONS Pressing 2 while viewing ANN BUS screen 2 will display the following screen 2 ANH 868 OPTIONS AHH 86 OPTIONS 1 PIEZ0 ENABLE ANN BUS Screen 2 2 LOCK ENABLE S ACK BTH ENABLE ANN 80 Options Screen 1 ANN S68 OPTIONS 1 SIL BTN ENABLE Z RST BTH ENABLE S DRL BETH ENABLE ANN 80 Options Screen 2 The Piezo Enable option allows the programmer to select whether the piezo sounder on any installed ANN 80 module will ever sound Pressing while viewing the ANN 80 Options Screen 1 causes the display to toggle between Piezo Enable Yes and Piezo Enable No The Lock Ena
90. CT UD2 Digital Alarm Communicator Transmitter which is optional for the MS 9600LS and supplied standard with the MS 9600UDLS Refer to the DACT UD2 Manual P N 53037 for detailed information The information presented in this section refers to programming the FACP via the onboard keypad If an optional computer keyboard is connected to the FACP main circuit board the following table describes the keyboard keys which correspond to the onboard keypad keys Keypad Keys Computer Keyboard Keys 1st Event Home CLR Delete ESC Esc RECALL Insert A Z A Z 0 9 0 9 NM on QZ key Space bar gt gt a dh Vv y ENTER Enter ACK STEP F1 SILENCE F2 DRILL F3 RESET F4 MS 9600LS Series Manual P N 52646 B2 2 12 2010 61 Programming User Programming 3 2 User Programming The FACP is completely field programmable and requires no special software skills While pro gramming the FACE the fire protection capabilities of the control panel are enabled Program ming mode will time out following 10 minutes of inactivity Site specific programming may be accomplished in three ways Autoprogramming Feature This is a convenient method for quickly bringing the FACP addressable SLC devices on line without the necessity of programming each device individually Refer to Autoprogram on page 66 for a detailed description of Autoprogramming e Manual progra
91. Defined 12 same as previous Supervisory Supervisory AR Supervisory nonlatching tracking User Defined 13 same as previous Supervisory AR HVAC OVRRIDE Switch Supervisory nonlatching tracking Power Monitor Power Fault User Defined 14 same as previous Power Monitor Trouble Monitor Trouble User Defined 15 same as previous Trouble Monitor Process Monitor Piezo User Defined 16 same as previous Process Monitor Process Monitor AR 3 Piezo nonlatching tracking User Defined 17 same as previous Process Monitor AR Future not used Future not used Ack Switch Acts like panel Acknowledge Key Sil Switch Acts like panel Silence Key Reset Switch Acts like panel Reset Key Drill Switch Acts like panel Drill Key PAS Bypass PAS Disable HVAC RESTART Switch Drill Switch AR Drill Switch nonlatching tracking Table 3 1 Monitor Types 1 Conventional 2 wire smoke detectors may be powered using an external power supply with an SLC Control Relay Module programmed for Resettable Power operation refer to note 1 on page page 89 2 Combination systems employing these non fire monitor types require the SLC loop to be programmed by the installer for Style 4 operation and isolator modules must be employed on each non fire branch of the SLC as per Figure 13 in the Fire Lite SLC Wiring Manual document number 51309 Fire and non fire devices must not be used on the same SLC branch 3 For all entries ending in AR AR refers to AutoResettabl
92. ERIFY LOOPS Programming Screen 2 PROGRAMMING 1 HISTORY 2 WALKTEST S O0PTION MODULES Programming Screen 3 PROGRAMMING 1 PASSWORD CHANGE 2 CLEAR PROGRAM S PROGRAM CHECK Programming Screen 4 MS 9600LS Series Manual P N 52646 B2 2 12 2010 65 Programming Master Programming Level 3 6 1 Autoprogram PROGRAMMING 1 AUTOPROGRAM Pressing while viewing Programming Screen 1 will select the Autoprogram option which 2 POINT PROGRAM prompts the control panel to poll all devices installed on one or both SLC loops The primary pur 3 Z0NE SETUP pose of autoprogramming is to allow the installer a fast and easy way to bring the system on line as quickly as possible The first time the system is powered up it should be autoprogrammed Programming Screen 1 If the system is already programmed and Autoprogram is initiated the system will only add default values for newly installed devices When Autoprogram is selected the programmer is given the option of autoprogramming all loops only loop 1 or only loop 2 The following will be displayed on the LCD AUTOPROGRAM 1 LOOF 1 2 LOOP 2 S ALL LOOPS Autoprogram Loop Select Screen After selecting one of the Autoprogram options the control panel will begin autoprogramming the system by communicating with each addressable device installed on one or both loops While auto programming the panel will display the following AUTOPROGRAM AUTOPROGRAMMING PLE
93. ERVICE TERMINAL 2 PRINTER PC 3 PRINT Read Status Screen 5 To print program data or control panel status press 3 while viewing Read Status Screen 5 The following screens will be displayed PRINT 1 HISTORY Z WALKTEST LOG S DETECTOR DATA Print Screen 1 PRINT 1 ExIT PRINTING Print Screen 2 Pressing while viewing Print Screen 1 allows the user to print the History file which will detail all of the system activities since the file was last cleared from memory Pressing 2 while viewing Print Screen 1 allows the user to print the Walktest log which will detail all of the system activations during walktest since the log was last cleared Refer to Walktest on page 160 for additional information on the display Pressing 3 while viewing Print Screen 1 allows the user to print the detector data for each address able smoke detector connected to the system A printout similar to the following example will be generated if an optional printer is connected to the FACP DEVICE DEVICE TYPE DRIFT COMP CHAMBER TIME DATE 1D001 1D002 1D003 1D004 1D005 1D006 1D007 1D008 1D009 SMOKE PHOTO 20 1281 12 01AM 01 08 2001 SMOKE PHOTO 20 1281 12 01AM 01 08 2001 SMOKE PHOTO 21 1259 12 01AM 01 08 2001 SMOKE PHOTO 20 1309 12 02AM 01 08 2001 SMOKE PHOTO 21 1281 12 02AM 01 08 2001 SMOKE PHOTO 20 1322 12 02AM 01 08 2001 SMOKE PHOTO 20 1280 12 02AM 01 08 2001 SMOKE PHOTO 20 1215 12 02AM 01 08
94. FOR EXACT TERMINAL LOCATIONS TO PREVENT SEVERE MODULE DAMAGE IMPORTANT All connections between the FACP and Keltron modules must be made within 20 feet and enclosed within conduit or equivalently protected against mechanical injury Keltron 95M3158 TTM RPS 1 Terminals 7 and 8 Remote station alarm trouble inputs 2 Terminals 9 and 10 Sprinkler supervisory input 4XTMF Module p Tip Tip ie Ring Telephone Line Ring 1 2 2 7 KELTRON 9 Earth Earth KELTRON 7 T gt To Central 8 95M3158 95M3083 0 gt Remote 1Q 9 TTM RPS 4 LD 4 TRM RP 9 _ gt Station 10 UL Listed 5 Qs UL Listed 10H gt 8th Edition Only 8th Edition Only l 6 D 6 r a 7 RP 3 3K gt To Power I LI laa Bak gt Supply 0 5w L0 5w l Note For more information refer to Keltron manual Sprinkler i TE Supervisory Signal _ 1 Alarm Trouble Signal e k Shes i it 5 EA eee oe a DE ee pe i I VELA AWE VELAS NO NC C NONC C NONC C 123456 Sav rat leat noNRSTlzad NONRST l ALARM TRBL SUPV i I Note Cut TBL jumper on 4XTMF module to send alarm trouble signal from the same pair or terminals Fire Alarm Control Panel terminal blocks are not shown in their actual positions in order to clarify wiring connections Figure D 1 Wiring to Keltron
95. G 3 25 mm ElA 485 annunciator modules impedance of 120 ohms power limited ANN BUS Connects to Twisted pair 6 000 1 800 m Refer to ANN BUS Wiring on page 23 for wire ElA 485 annunciator modules requirements Power limited ElA 232 connects to remote Twisted shielded pair 50 15 m 18 AWG 0 75 mm minimum power limited PC computer MMF 300 and Initiating Device Maximum loop wire resistance 2 500 760 m 12 18 AWG 3 25 0 75 mm MMF 301 Circuit is 40 ohms for the MMF 300 power limited and 20 ohms for the MMF 301 MMF 302 Initiating Device No more than a 2 4 volt drop 2 500 760 m 12 18 AWG 3 25 0 75 mm power limited Circuit allowed at end of circuit Maximum loop wire resistance is 25 ohms CMF 300 power limited Notification Appliance Circuit In alarm no more than a 1 2 volt drop allowed at end of circuit Distance limitation set by 1 2 volt maximum line drop 12 18 AWG 3 25 0 75 mm 196 Table E 1 FACP Wire Specifications 1 When using untwisted unshielded wire full conduit is recommended for optimum EMI RFI protection MS 9600LS Series Manual P N 52646 B2 2 12 2010 NAC Wiring Wire Requirements E 1 NAC Wiring The following table lists NAC wiring requirements for the FACP Max CLASS B CLASS A re allowable Max allowable wire pair length Max allowable wire pair len
96. HECK cause the following screen to be displayed Programming Screen 4 PASSWORD CHANGE 1 MASTER 2 MAINTEHAHCE S REMOTE DOWNLOAD Password Change Screen Press to change the Master Programming Level password 2 to change the Maintenance Level password or 3 to change the Remote Download password Note that the passwords will not be dis played on LCD annunciators The following screen will appear when either change option is selected ENTER WEW FIVE DIGIT PASSWORD NS Enter Password Screen A flashing cursor will appear in the center of the display Enter a new five digit password such as 10101 for the Master Level After the fifth digit is entered the following screen will be displayed VERIFY HEW PASSWORD Password Change Screen Re enter the new password to accept the change The display will return to the initial Password Change Screen MS 9600LS Series Manual P N 52646 B2 2 12 2010 135 Programming Master Programming Level 3 6 11 Clear Program eo Curie Pressing 2 while viewing Programming Screen 4 will select the Clear Program option This will 2 CLEAR PROGRAM cause the LCD to display the following screens 3 PROGRAM CHECK Programming Screen 4 CLEAR PROGRAM 1 WHOLE SYSTEM 2 ALL LOOPS 3 LO0P1 Clear Program Screen 1 CLEAR PROGRAM 1 LO0P2 Clear Program Screen 2 Pressing for Whole System while viewing the Clear Program Screen 1 will clear all general
97. INE TIMER 68 ANN S PG Options Screen 1 ANH S PG OPTIONS 1 BAUD RATE H A 2 DATA BITS HA 3 PARITY HA ANN S PG Options Screen 2 ANH S PG OPTIONS C 1 STOP BITS HA ANN S PG Options Screen 3 Pressing for Port while viewing ANN S PG Options screen 1 will allow the programmer to select between a Parallel and Serial Port for printer connection Each press of the key will cause the display to toggle between Port PAR parallel and Port SER serial It is important to note that the interface selected determines which options are available to the user If the Parallel Port option is selected the user has the option to supervise the printer and select an offline timer for the supervision by pressing 2 for Printer Supervision while viewing Print Options screen 1 Each press of the 2 key will cause the display to toggle between Printer Supv NO for no supervision and Printer Supv YES for printer supervision Note that this option is not selectable 1f the Serial Port option has been selected If the Parallel Port option is selected the user has the ability to select an Offline Timer by pressing 3 while viewing Print Options screen 1 The resultant screen allows the programmer to program the Offline Timer for a delay of between 0 and 255 seconds before loss of printer supervision is reported as a trouble If the Serial Port option is selected the Printer Supv and Offline Timer options will not be available The Baud Rate Data
98. MBT 1 Municipal Box Trip Silenceable The following figure illustrates the connection of the MBT 1 Municipal Box Trip between the FACP and a Local Energy Municipal Box The use of an addressable control module programmed for General Alarm and Silenceable allows silencing of the Municipal Box without resetting the panel or box Connect wires to two red terminals on box Note 100 maximum loop resistance due to wiring from power supply to Municipal Box Gamewell Model M34 56 Local Energy Municipal Box All contacts shown in energized position white wire MBT 1 The CMF 300 mustbe To next device programmed as Silenceable onSLC Loop and General Alarm 7 Braided shield Drain Wire i l AA J Alarm polarity shown EOLR 1 Power red black j Supervision Relay E AAN OS CMF 300 SLC Loop B B Shield 24 VDC Nonresettable MBT 1_MS 9600LS wmf 194 MS 9600LS Series Manual P N 52646 B2 2 12 2010 Appendix D FACP with Keltron The following figure illustrates the connections between the FACP and Keltron Receiver Transmitter CAUTION POSSIBLE EQUIPMENT DAMAGE FOR REASONS OF WIRING DIAGRAM CLARITY TERMINAL DESIGNATIONS OF KELTRON MODULES ARE NOT SHOWN IN ACTUAL ORDER FOLLOW KELTRON MANUAL AND MODULE MARKINGS
99. MS 9600LS Series Manual P N 52646 B2 2 12 2010 Central Station Remote Station Transmitter Connection to FACP Dry Contacts NFPA Standard Specific Requirements C 1 Central Station Remote Station Transmitter Connection to FACP Dry Contacts The dry contacts of the FACP programmable relays can be used to trip a UL 864 Listed Central Station Remote Station Transmitter The FACP contacts must be supervised by the Central Station Remote Station Transmitter module using End of Line Resistors ELRs with a value determined by the Transmitter manufacturer Power is also provided by the Central Station Remote Station Transmitter manufacturer Refer to the Central Station Remote Station Transmitter manufacturer s manual for details Typical Central Station Remote Station Transmitter Module Typical Input Zone Triggers 00000000 00000000 Note The Trouble Relay is a fail safe relay With power applied to the FACP and no troubles in the panel the wiring should be connected to the NO and C contacts as indicated in the illustration Supervisory A TB6 ms9600Isdryxmit wmf FACP Main Circuit Board Figure C 6 FACP Dry Contacts Connection to Central Station Remote Station Transmitter MS 9600LS Series Manual P N 52646 B2 2 12 2010 193 NFPA Standard Specific Requirements MBT 1 Municipal Box Trip Silenceable C 2
100. Manual P N 52646 B2 2 12 2010 Pressing while viewing the Noun Adjective Screen will cause the following screen s to be dis played Note that the keyboard down arrow key must be pressed to see all the Adjective screens Press the number corresponding to the adjective that is to be used as a descriptor for the location of the detector currently being programmed When an adjective has been selected it will appear at the top of the display as indicated by the asterisks le eal EEE EEE 1 WEST 2 FRONT 3 CENTER Adjective Screen 2 be le te te AEREA 1 MAIN 2 FIRST 3 2ND Adjective Screen 4 SESE EEE EEE Et 1 FLOOR1 2 FLOOR2 3 FLOORS Adjective Screen 6 75 Programming Master Programming Level Pressing 2 while viewing the Noun Adjecti ill the followi t is STANDARD ADJECTIVE soe Ww e editen e ey djec 7 Screen id a e fo spac a 0 2 2 STANDARD NOUN played Note that the ey oard down arrow ey must be presse to see all the oun screens Press 3 CUSTOM ADJECTIVE the number corresponding to the noun that is to be used as a descriptor for the location of the detec 4 CUSTOM NOUN tor currently being programmed When a noun has been selected it will appear at the top of the display as indicated by the asterisks Noun Adjective Screen a 1 CLOSET SEE EEE Ett 1 BASEMENT 2 BOILER RM S CLASSROOM 2 CORRIDOR S ELECTRIC RM Noun Screen 1 Noun Screen 2 SESE EEE EEE EEE EE Et See ee le ei
101. NFPA 72 after any pro gramming operation or change in site specific software Re acceptance testing is required after any change addition or deletion of system components or after any modification repair or adjustment to system hardware or wiring All compo nents circuits system operations or software functions known to be affected by a change must be 100 tested In addition to ensure that other operations are not inadvertently affected at least 10 of initiating devices that are not directly affected by the change up to a maximum of 50 devices must also be tested and proper system operation verified This system meets NFPA requirements for operation at 0 49 C 32 120 F and at a relative humidity 93 2 RH non condensing at 32 C 2 C 90 F 3 F However the useful life of the system s standby batteries and the electronic com ponents may be adversely affected by extreme temperature ranges and humidity Therefore it is recommended that this system and its peripherals be installed in an environment with a normal room temperature of 15 27 C 60 80 F Verify that wire sizes are adequate for all initiating and indi cating device loops Most devices cannot tolerate more than a 10 I R drop from the specified device voltage FCC Warning WARNING This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual may cause interference to ra
102. NN BUS Devices from Auxiliary Power Supply on page 26 After calculating the total worst case current draw Table 1 1 specifies the maximum distance the modules can be located from the FACP on a single wire run The table ensures 6 0 volts of line drop maximum In general the wire length is limited by resistance but for heavier wire gauges MS 9600LS Series Manual P N 52646 B2 2 12 2010 23 Product Description Accessories capacitance is the limiting factor These cases are marked in the chart with an asterisk Maxi mum length can never be more than 6 000 feet 1 800 m regardless of gauge used The formula used to generate this chart is shown in the note below Wiring Distance ANN BUS Modules to FACP Total thi pei 22 Gauge 18 Gauge 16 Gauge 14 Gauge 0 100 1 852 ft 4 688 ft 6 000 ft 6 000 ft 0 200 926 ft 2 344 ft 3 731 ft 5 906 ft 0 300 617 ft 1 563 ft 2 488 ft 3 937 ft 0 400 463 ft 1 172 ft 1 866 ft 2 953 ft 0 500 370 ft 938 ft 1 493 ft 2 362 ft Table 1 1 Wiring Distances The following formulas were used to generate the wire distance chart 6 0 volts Maximum Resistance Ohms Total Worst Case Current Draw amps Maximum Wire Length feet Maximum Resistance Ohms i 500 6 000 feet maximum Rpu where Rpu Ohms per 1 000 feet for various Wire Gauges see table below Wire Gauge Ohms per 1 000 feet Rpu 22 16 2 18 6 4
103. ORMAL MONITOR ADJ lt HOUN gt HHH 1M1611 2 To change the programming for the displayed module press the kevboard down arrow key to view the following Edit Monitor screens In the preceding example e Normal indicates that the module with the selected address is physically installed on the SLC and communicating with the control panel enabled e lt ADJ gt lt NOUN gt represents the adjective and noun which have been programmed describing the location of the displayed device e ZNNN represents the first of five possible software zones that the module is assigned to NNN the two digit zone number from 000 099 e 1M012 represents the Loop Device type and Device address 1 SLC Loop 1 M Module and 012 Module Address 012 If the selected address corresponds to a control module a screen displaying information about the control module with the selected address will be displayed as shown in Edit Module Screen for Control Modules on page 88 MS 9600LS Series Manual P N 52646 B2 2 12 2010 Master Programming Level Programming If the selected address corresponds to a monitor module a screen displaying information about the module with the selected address will be displayed as illustrated in the following HORMAL MONITOR ADJ lt HDUN HHH 1M611 2 EDIT MONITOR imbi2 1 ENABLED YES 2 TYPE MONITOR Edit Monitor Screen 2 EDIT MONITOR iM iz 1 1 PRE SIGHAL HO Edit Monitor Scre
104. PECT TO THE PRODUCTS TRADEMARKS PROGRAMS AND SERVICES RENDERED BY MANUFACTURER INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION INFRINGEMENT TITLE MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE MANUFACTURER SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY PERSONAL INJURY OR DEATH WHICH MAY ARISE IN THE COURSE OF OR AS A RESULT OF PERSONAL COMMERCIAL OR INDUSTRIAL USES OF ITS PRODUCTS This document constitutes the only warranty made by Manufacturer with respect to its products and replaces all previous warranties and is the only warranty made by Manufacturer No increase or alteration written or verbal of the obligation of this warranty is authorized Manufacturer does not represent that its products will prevent any loss by fire or otherwise Warranty Claims Manufacturer shall replace or repair at Manufacturer s discretion each part returned by its authorized Distributor and acknowledged by Manufacturer to be defective provided that such part shall have been returned to Manufacturer with all charges prepaid and the authorized Distributor has completed Manufacturer s Return Material Authorization form The replacement part shall come from Manufacturer s stock and may be new or refurbished THE FOREGOING IS DISTRIBUTOR S SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDY IN THE EVENT OF A WARRANTY CLAIM Warn HL 08 2009 fm MS 9600LS Series Manual P N 52646 B2 2 12 2010 Fire LITe ALarms by Honeywell World Headquarters 1 Firelite Place Northford CT 06472 1653 USA 20
105. Phone Line 2 supervision 169 phone lines DACT installation 54 Piezo see also sounder 18 Point Program 67 Positive Alarm Sequence 72 158 see also PAS 14 power NAC 14 nonresettable 16 resettable 89 resettable smoke 16 power supply calculations 174 power limited relay connections 47 power limited wiring requirements 50 Power up first time 63 Pre signal 14 73 96 function 158 selection 84 Pre signal Delay timer 105 primary power see also AC Power 46 printer baud rate 134 configuration 59 connection 58 ground fault 59 setup 59 Printer PC interface 14 Process Monitor 155 PROCMON AR 113 Program check 137 check correlations 137 clear 136 Program Check Maintenance Level 141 MS 9600LS Series Manual P N 52646 B2 2 12 2010 program keys see also Key Panel 18 Programming 61 62 autoprogramming 62 exiting 63 factory default 186 Level 1 63 Level 2 63 manual 62 Master Level 1 65 modules 78 off line computer 62 via computer keyboard 61 via panel keypad 61 Programming Levels 63 Programming Screens 63 Programming Sheet 180 181 182 183 185 Programming Utility see also PS Tools 21 PRT PK CABLE for PC Printer connection 59 PS Tools Programming Utility 21 R Read Status 62 161 annunciators 167 169 exiting 63 history 167 NAC 166 power 164 Print 171 printer PC 170 program check 167 relay 166 system point 162 Time Date 173 timers 165 trouble reminder 165 zones 163 Real Time Clock 157 R
106. Point 12 Point 13 Point 14 Point 15 Active Alarm Active Alarm Active Alarm Active Alarm Active Alarm Point 11 Point 12 Point 13 Point 14 Point 15 Trouble Trouble Trouble Trouble Trouble Point 11 Point 12 Point 13 Point 14 Point 15 Supervisory Supervisory Supervisory Supervisory Supervisory Point 16 Point 17 Point 18 Point 19 Point 20 Active Alarm Active Alarm Active Alarm Active Alarm Active Alarm Point 16 Point 17 Point 18 Point 19 Point 20 Trouble Trouble Trouble Trouble Trouble Point 16 Point 17 Point 18 Point 19 Point 20 Supervisory Supervisory Supervisory Supervisory Supervisory ANN LED Module 2 Point Range 11 20 The LED assignments for the modules annunciating Point Ranges 21 30 31 40 and 41 50 51 60 61 70 71 80 81 90 91 100 101 110 111 120 121 130 131 140 141 150 and 151 159 will follow the same pattern as the second ANN LED Module MS 9600LS Series Manual P N 52646 B2 2 12 2010 Master Programming Level Programming ANN RLY Options Pressing 2 for Module Options while viewing ANN BUS Address Screen when the ANN RLY option is selected will cause the following screen to be displayed ANH RLY ADDR 1 RELAY 1 ONE Bb 2 RELAY 2 ZONE 61 S RELAY 3 ONE 82 ANN RLY Options Screen The ANN RLY module provides ten Form C relays which can be programmed for various func tions The initial screen displays Relays 1 through 3 Pressing the down arrow key will
107. Pressing 2 while viewing Daylight Savings Screen 2 will display two sub screens which allow the programmer to select the week of the month that daylight savings time will end In the first sub screen pressing will select the first week 2 will select the second week and 3 will select the third week while in the second sub screen pressing 4 will select the fourth week and 5 will select the last week of the selected month MS 9600LS Series Manual P N 52646 B2 2 12 2010 Master Programming Level Programming SYSTEM SETUP umes EIDE i Timer delays for PAS Pre signal and waterflow activation can be programmed by pressing while S RELAYS viewing System Setup Screen 2 The following screen will be displayed System Setup Screen 2 TIMERS it 1 PAS DELAY alal 2 PRE SIGNAL BEE S WATERFLOW Bab Timer Screen 1 TIMERS 1 AC LOSS DELAY BBB Timer Screen 2 PAS Positive Alarm Sequence Delay 1 PAS DELAY B n 2 PRE SIGNAL 0G The factory default setting for PAS is 000 for no delay To select a PAS delay of 001 to 180 seconds for all devices programmed for PAS press while viewing Timer Screen 1 The following dis S WATERFLOW Timer Screen 1 play will appear PAS DELAY PAS Delay Screen A flashing cursor is positioned in the lower left corner of the display Enter a delay time consisting of three digits such as 005 for five seconds Upon entering the third digit the time delay will be s
108. Printer MS 9600LS Series Manual P N 52646 B2 2 12 2010 195 Appendix E Wire Requirements Ttapping of the SLC loop wiring is allowed for 2 wire Style 4 configurations The total resistance of any branch cannot exceed 40 ohms The total wire length of all branches cannot exceed 10 000 feet 3 000 m Connecting external system accessories to the FACP main circuits must be carefully considered to ensure proper operation It is important to use the correct type of wire wire gauge and wire run length for each FACP circuit Reference the chart below to specify wire requirements and limitations for each FACP circuit Note 1 Ifthe SLC loop is to be run in conduit with Notification Appliance Circuits the risk of encountering problems can be greatly reduced by exclusively employing electronic sounders instead of more electronically noisy notification appliances such as electromechanical bells or horns 2 Iftwo SLC loops are to be installed in conduit each loop must be installed in separate conduit 3 The SLC can be programmed to operate in LiteSpeed mode factory default setting for a quicker device response time While shielded wire is not required in LiteSpeed mode it is recommended that all SLC wiring be twisted pair to minimize the effects of electrical interference Use the following table to determine the specific wiring requirements for the SLC when unshielded wire is used CIRCUIT CONNECTIONS WIRE REQUIREMENTS
109. S 9600LS requires connection to the Serial Port on FACP con nector TB7 Remote programming requires that the PC have a 2400 baud or faster modem MS 9600LS Series Manual P N 52646 B2 2 12 2010 21 Product Description Accessories 22 Important Remote modification of FACP programming requires that the panel be enabled for remote download refer to the DACT UD2 manual Remote interrogation of panel programming history logs detector status etc is possible without enabling the remote download option 1 8 2 Dress Panel DP 9692 A DP 9692 dress panel is available for the FACP required for Canadian installations The dress panel restricts access to the system wiring while allowing access to the key panel The MS 9600LSC has received ULC approval ULC approval is contingent on the proper installa tion of the dress panel which is provided with the FACP dp9600 wmf 1 8 3 TR CE Trim Ring An optional TR CE trim ring is available for semi flush mounting the FACP backbox 1 8 4 Battery Box BB 26 The BB 26 battery box may be used to house up to two 26 AH batteries and the CHG 75 Battery Charger The battery box is red and is provided with knockouts BB 55F The BB 55F battery box may be used to house two 26 AH batteries two 60 AH batteries or one 100 AH battery When the CHG 120 is mounted in the BB 55F two 26 AH or one 60 AH battery may also be housed in the battery box 1 8 5 Battery Charger CHG 75 Battery Charger
110. S Series Manual P N 52646 B2 2 12 2010 Software Downloads In order to supply the latest features and functionality in fire alarm and life safety technology to our customers we make frequent upgrades to the embedded software in our products To ensure that you are installing and programming the latest features we strongly recommend that you download the most current version of software for each product prior to commissioning any system Contact Technical Support with any questions about software and the appropriate version for a specific application Documentation Feedback Your feedback helps us keep our documentation up to date and accurate If you have any comments or suggestions about our online Help or printed manuals you can email us Please include the following information Product name and version number if applicable Printed manual or online Help Topic Title for online Help Page number for printed manual Brief description of content you think should be improved or corrected Your suggestion for how to correct improve documentation Send email messages to FireSystems TechPubs honeywell com Please note this email address is for documentation feedback only If you have any technical issues please contact Technical Services 4 MS 9600LS Series Manual P N 52646 B2 2 12 2010 Table of Contents Section 1 Product Description occooccoccconenonennncnnnnnnnannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn
111. Series Manual P N 52646 B2 2 12 2010 101 Programming Master Programming Level Pressing while viewing the Banner Screen will select the blank factory default banner setting and 1 FACTORY i i S USER DEFINED display the following screen Banner Screen FACTORY BANNER Factory Banner Screen Pressing the Enter key will store this selection in nonvolatile memory and return the display to the Banner Screen Pressing 2 while viewing the Banner Screen will display the following screens USER DEFINED BANNER PRESS ENTER IF OK User Defined Banner Screen 1 USER BANHER LINE 2 PRESS ENTER IF OK bee ett t tt User Defined Banner Screen 2 These screens allow the programmer to enter a two line custom banner A flashing cursor will appear in the bottom left corner of each display A maximum of 20 characters including spaces can be entered into each screen for a total of two lines with 40 characters After entering up to 20 characters in the first screen press Enter to view the second screen Enter up to 20 characters in the second screen in the same manner or just press Enter if a second banner line is not being entered To quickly clear the current banner press the CLR key To enter alphanumeric characters from the keypad repeatedly press the appropriate key until the desired character is displayed in the first position For example to enter the letter B press the 2 ABC key three times to toggle through t
112. Status functions do not require a password The control panel will continue to provide fire protection while in Read Status mode This mode can be entered while the control panel is in alarm or trouble If a new alarm or trouble occurs during these functions the Read Status is exited to pre vent confusion MS 9600LS Series Manual P N 52646 B2 2 12 2010 Read Status Operating Instructions Read Status Entry When the operator presses the control panel Enter key the LCD will display the following 1 READ STATUS 2 PROGRAMMING 3 REMOTE DOWMLOAD Pressing while this screen is being displayed will cause the control panel to enter the Read Sta tus mode which allows the user to view and print the programmed features and status of the control panel The following screens will be displayed READ STATUS READ STATUS 1 SYSTEM POINT 1 TROUBLE REMINDER 2 Z0NES 2 TIMERS PONER S HACS Read Status Screen 1 Read Status Screen 2 READ STATUS READ STATUS 1 RELAYS 1 ANNUNCIATORS 2 PROGRAM CHECK 2 PHONE LINE S HISTORY S CENTRAL STATION Read Status Screen 3 Read Status Screen 4 READ STATUS READ STATUS 1 SERVICE TERMINAL 1 TIME DATE 2 PRINTER PC 3 PRINT Read Status Screen 5 Read Status Screen 6 MS 9600LS Series Manual P N 52646 B2 2 12 2010 161 Operating Instructions Read Status 4 22 1 System Point Era LATIS Pressing 1 while viewing Read Status Screen 1 will cause the following screen to be dis
113. Sync feature is selected Silence will turn off both audible and visual devices MS 9600LS Series Manual P N 52646 B2 2 12 2010 109 Programming Master Programming Level HL Y 1 AUTO SILENCE 2 CODING TEMPORAL NAC Screen 2 110 m Auto Silence The Auto Silence feature when enabled automatically silences all main circuit board silenceable notification appliances after a programmed length of time To enable this feature and program the time delay before Auto Silence activation press while viewing NAC Screen 2 The following screens will be displayed AUTO SILENCE 1 HO 2 3 MINUTES 3 16 MINUTES Auto Silence Screen 1 AUTO SILENCE 1 15 MINUTES 2 28 MINUTES 3 25 MINUTES Auto Silence Screen 2 AUTO SILENCE 1 36 MINUTES Auto Silence Screen 3 To disable the Auto Silence feature press for No while viewing Auto Silence Screen 1 To enable the Auto Silence feature press the number corresponding to the time delay which will elapse before Auto Silence activates When a time delay is selected the information will be stored in memory and the display will return to NAC Screen 2 m Coding The Coding feature allows the programmer to select the type of output that the main circuit board notification appliances will generate when activated Pressing 2 while viewing NAC Screen 2 will cause the following displays to appear CODING 1 STEADY 2 MARCH TIME 3 CALIFORNIA Coding Screen 1
114. T 2 S STEM 3 ZONE SETUP Maintenance Screen 2 142 To perform a walktest press while viewing Maintenance Screen 2 The following screen will be displayed WALK TEST 1 SILEHT 2 AUDIBLE S VIEW RESULT Walktest Screen The operator can press to perform a silent walktest or 2 to perform an audible walktest The dis play will read UNIT IN WALKTEST To end the Walktest press the Esc Escape key Pressing 3 after the walktest has been completed will allow the operator to view the results of the walktest MS 9600LS Series Manual P N 52646 B2 2 12 2010 Maintenance Programming Level Programming 3 7 5 System To program the time and date into the control panel press 2 while viewing Maintenance Screen 2 The following display will appear SYSTEMS 1 TIME DATE System Screen Pressing while viewing the System Screen will cause the following screen to be displayed TIME AHD DATE 1 TIME 61 66 AM 2 DATE 1 61 2687 12HR Time and Date Screen To change the time press to display the following screen ENTER TIME 61 46 AM 1 AM Time Screen A flashing cursor will appear on the left side of the display Enter the four digit number corre sponding to the time 0000 1259 When the fourth digit is entered the cursor will move one position to the right Press for AM or 2 for PM to complete entering the time The display will return to the Time and Date Screen displaying the new time
115. T MOD 35 LOOP ANN LED Address Screen 3 The first screen indicates that the ANN LED at the selected ANN BUS address is programmed to annunciate Alarms Supervisories and Troubles for SLC Loop 1 addressable Detectors with addresses 1 through 10 The programming can be changed using ANN LED Address Screens 2 and 3 Pressing while viewing ANN LED Address Screen 2 will program the annunciator module to annunciate either Point addressable device address information or Zone information Pressing 2 while viewing ANN LED Address Screen 2 will program the annunciator module to annunciate only Alarms for addressable device addresses 1 30 or Alarms Supervisories and Trou bles for addressable device addresses 1 10 Pressing while viewing ANN LED Address Screen 3 will select the Point or Zone range to be annunciated refer to the tables in ANN LED Zone Option Alarm Only for use with ANN RLED module on page 127 and ANN LED Point Option Alarm Only for use with ANN RLED module on page 129 Pressing 2 while viewing ANN LED Address Screen 3 will select either addressable detectors or addressable modules to be annunciated Pressing 3 while viewing ANN LED Address Screen 3 will select the SLC loop with the address able devices to be annunciated 126 MS 9600LS Series Manual P N 52646 B2 2 12 2010 Master Programming Level Programming ANN LED Zone Option Alarm Only for use with ANN RLED module If Zone
116. Voice Evac Fault The only connection between the FACP and ACC 25 S0ZS Series audio panel is a pair of commu nication wires connected between the A B terminals on TB9 of the FACP and TB1 terminals 2 amp 3 of the ACC ZPMK module on the audio panel vaa vn ACC ZPMK on ACC 25 50ZS Series VLN VA VHIVVVVVVI acczpmtoms9600udls wmf Figure 1 16 FACP Connection to ACC 25 50ZS Series Audio Panel MS 9600LS Series Manual P N 52646 B2 2 12 2010 39 Product Description Getting Started 1 8 7 Legacy ACS Annunciators WARNING RISK OF ELECTRICAL SHOCK AND EQUIPMENT DAMAGE DISCONNECT ALL SOURCES OF POWER AC AND DC BEFORE INSTALLING OR REMOVING ANY MODULES OR WIRING The legacy ACS annunciators may not be used if new ANN BUS annunciators are being used due to incompatible serial communication protocols ACM Series LED Zone Type Annunciators The ACM Series Annunciators remotely display alarm and trouble status as well as system status For more detailed information refer to the appropriate annunciator manual Following is a list of annunciators which can be used with the FACP e ACM 16ATF Annunciator Control Module annunciates 16 zones with 16 red alarm LEDs and 16 yellow trouble LEDs In addition it has a System Trouble LED an On Line Power LED and a local piezo sounder In Canada this module must be used to annunciate the fire alarm input points zones only AEM 16ATF Annunciator Expander Module annunci
117. a screen similar to the following to be displayed PROGRAM CHECK 1 HACS NO INPUT 2 Z0NES HO INPUT S Z0NHES HO OUTPUT Pressing while viewing the Program Check screen will display a screen which will indicate if any input zones have not been programmed to one of the Notification Appliance Circuits Use the up and down arrow keys to view all NACs Pressing 2 while viewing the Program Check screen will display a screen which will indicate if any output zones have not been programmed to at least one input zone Use the up and down arrow keys to view all zones Pressing 3 while viewing the Program Check screen will display a screen which will indicate if any input zones have not been programmed to at least one output zone Use the up and down arrow keys to view all zones 4 22 9 History Pressing 3 while viewing Read Status Screen 3 will display the following screen HISTORY 1 VIEW ALL 2 VIEW ALARMS S VIEW OTHER EVENTS The operator can view all events which have been stored in the history file only alarms or other events such as troubles or supervisories by pressing the corresponding number key 4 22 10 Annunciators Pressing while viewing Read Status Screen 4 will display the following screens READ STATUS 1 ANNUNCIATORS ANHUNCIATORS TERM ENABLED YES 2 PHONE LINES S CENTRAL STATION 2 ACLS OPTIONS Read Status Screen 4 S AHH BUS OPTIONS Annunciator Screen MS 9600LS Series Manual P N 52646 B2 2
118. ach module having a unique address from to 99 Detectors comprise a separate group of 99 addresses each detector having a unique address from to 99 in its group Be careful not to duplicate addresses within any one group modules and detectors Refer to the following page for an example of zoning In the example on the following page Zone 01 has the following addressable devices assigned to it SD350 smoke detectors with addresses 0 and 02 e MMF 300 monitor module with address 07 MMF 302 monitor module with address 02 and 03 e CMF 300 control modules with addresses 05 06 07 09 and 13 Zone 02 has the following addressable devices assigned to it e MMF 302 monitor module with addresses 02 and 03 e CP350 smoke detectors with addresses 03 and 04 e CMF 300 control modules with addresses 08 09 and 10 e Zone 03 has the following addressable devices assigned to it SD350 smoke detectors with addresses 05 06 and 07 e MMF 302 control module with address 04 e CMF 300 control modules with addresses 09 11 and 12 The example points out some of the key assignment features of the FACP Addresses of detectors are not duplicated Addresses of monitor and control modules are not duplicated The control module with address 09 is assigned to three software zones providing floor above and floor below Be careful to properly plan the installation prior to installing any devices 1 CLIP or Classic Loop Interface Protocol devices
119. ain the key switch is in the ON Unlocked position Swing the cover closed snapping it shut 4 Turn the key switch to the OFF Locked position by turning clockwise and remove the key MS 9600LS Series Manual P N 52646 B2 2 12 2010 27 Product Description Accessories 28 Annuneiator cover ge near backplate with LCD R ann80_iso wmf Press in latch and Pull annunciator cover open Key switch shown in OFF Locked positio Figure 1 5 ANN 80 Mounting TheANN 80 can be surface or semi flush mounted to a single double or 4 square electrical box Select and remove the appropriate knockout s pull the necessary wires through the knockouts and mount the annunciator in or on the wall depending on the type of installation desired The ANN SB80KIT R B W is an available mounting kit for the ANN 80 annunciator The kit comes with a surface backbox and surface wedge for angled viewing The two pieces can be used separately or can be stacked together The ANN 80 cover must be attached to the annunciator backplate before mounting the annunciator to the electrical box wall The cover cannot be reattached or removed after the annunciator has been mounted aann80kitmount wmf Annunciator mounted on Annunciator mounted on Annunciator mounted on stacked surface wedge from the surface backbox from the surface wedge and backbox from ANN SB80KIT ANN SB80KIT the ANN SB80KIT MS 9600LS Series Manual P N 52646 B2
120. al Box Connected to 4XTMF Transmitter Module on page 190 NFPA 72 Proprietary Fire Alarm System FACP Alarm Trouble and Supervisory contacts connected to Transmitter s See Figure C 5 Proprietary Protective Signaling System on page 192 for installation instructions for this unit MS 9600LS Series Manual P N 52646 B2 2 12 2010 187 NFPA Standard Specific Requirements Monitor Module ELR resistor NFPA Signaling Systems for Central Station Service Protected Premises Unit Remote Station The following figure illustrates an example of Central Station Remote Station Reporting using a 411UDAC The relay contacts from the FACP may be used to trip any dialer UL listed for Central Station Remote Station Services Notes Reference the 411UDAC Manual for additional information 2 Program the 411UDAC for slave operation 3 The FACP must be programmed for AC Loss Reporting Delay This prevents the transmission of a trouble on the loss of AC power Program the 411UDAC as follows Channel 1 Normally Open Contact Device alarm Channel 2 Host Panel Trouble Channel 3 Supervisory 411UDAC Relay 2 Output DACT Trouble Channel 2 Zone 2 Channel 1 Zone 1 Channel 3 Zone 3 w 2 2K EOLR Note The Monitor Module input RECAYT HEL NO NC C ND NC pay o 81 wa rer MUY UA which is being used to monitor the 411UDAC Relay Output Eh I LJ programmed for DACT Trou
121. an example the user could quickly enter FLR_3 ROOM 305 as follows 1 The cursor is on the first letter of the Adjective field Press the zero key twice to display FLR_3 2 With the cursor on the first letter of the Noun field press the zero key twice to recall the display ROOM _304 The cursor automatically jumps from the first to the last letter of the Noun field 3 With the cursor on the last letter of the Noun field press the zero key again to increment the room number to 305 4 Press the right arrow key to advance the zone field 5 Select a zone number from 00 to 99 Z00 default zone is the general alarm zone Z01 through Z99 may be selected to link software zones MS 9600LS Series Manual P N 52646 B2 2 12 2010 87 Programming Master Programming Level m Edit Module Screen for Control Modules The programmer can change a module s existing or factory default programming by pressing 3 in Penes the Modules Screen The following screen will be displayed 2 DELETE 3 EDIT EDIT MODULE Modules Screen ENTER MODULE ADDRESS Edit Module Screen A flashing cursor will appear in the position of the first asterisk to the left The programmer keys in the three digit module address such as 002 When the last digit is keyed in if the selected address corresponds to a control module a screen displaying information about the control module with the selected address will be displayed as illustrated in the followi
122. and Devices Installation 2 6 Optional Modules and Devices A MS 9600LS Series Manual P N 52646 B2 2 12 2010 WARNING RISK OF ELECTRICAL SHOCK AND EQUIPMENT DAMAGE DISCONNECT ALL SOURCES OF POWER AC AND DC BEFORE INSTALLING OR REMOVING ANY MODULES OR WIRING FACP Keypad Display Removal Removal of the keypad display is normally not necessary If however it becomes necessary to replace the keypad display access the auxiliary trouble bus connectors at J16 and J17 or install the DACT UD2 option module on J2 the Keypad Display can be removed by inserting a Phillips screwdriver into each of the three holes located in the flexible covering of the Keypad Display and loosening the three mounting screws Note that it is not necessary to disconnect the cables between the Keypad Display and the main circuit board unless the unit itself is being replaced Carefully lift the Keypad Display and rest the unit at the bottom of the main circuit board NOTE When installing the DACT UD2 the main motherboard must be removed from the chassis Unplug the power supply cable from J1 before proceeding Keypad Display Mounting Screw Access Hole screw standoff standoff screw 4XTM OPT BD JP10 RA MA MANTENANCE J OIT Sa O J SUPERVISORY i DISABLED J J TRousLe E BATTERY K3 GROUND J ACK STEP La x 96dact1 wmf ALARM Az SILENCE x ENTER RECALL screw screw Keypad Display Mounting Screw Acc
123. and Supervisory Relay MS 9600LS Series Manual P N 52646 B2 2 12 2010 Optional Modules and Devices Installation 8 When the installation has been complete enable the 4XTMF module by sliding the disconnect switch to the left 9 Test system for proper operation 000000 0000000 Standoff gt O 183 OO i E TBS 6 e i Gr wee mm MONITOR 4xTM JP6 mg E 0 eno o 4XTM OPT BD Cut Jumper JP6 pet wee YL ett J10 amp J11 Connectors 0 eee 11 4XTMF O JP2 o o JP3 J2 EA OPTDACT J17 J16 lo J6 Se sw EDSR AY KEYPAD I F TB2 FACP Ve BATTERY O oo00000 O 9604xtm1 wmf Figure 2 16 4XTMF Connectors to FACP Connectors NOTE Jumper JP5 on the FACP main circuit board can be used to configure the FACP supervisory relay for operation with the 4XTMF module The supervisory relay must be programmed as shown on the main circuit board silk screen TB5 Terminals 4 5 amp 6 Cutting JP5 will allow the 4XTMF to generate a trouble if the supervisory contact opens Leaving JP5 in will prevent generation of a trouble if the supervisory contact opens 2 6 3 Auxiliary Trouble Input J16 8 J17 Auxiliary Trouble Inputs 1 J17 and 2 J16 which are located on the FACP main circuit board can be used to monitor for trouble conditions on auxiliary equipment such as power supplies J16 and or J17 can be connected to any open collector trouble output on the aux
124. anel is mounted to the ELR plate Resistors mounted to the N ELR plate can be used for the supervision of a monitor and control module circuit 1 7 Optional Modules The FACP main circuit board includes option module connectors for the following modules 4XTMF Transmitter Module The 4XTMF provides a supervised output for local energy municipal box transmitter alarm and trouble reverse polarity It includes a disable switch and disable trouble LED A jumper on the module is used to select an option which allows the reverse polarity circuit to open with a system trouble condition if no alarm condition exists The module plugs into connectors J10 and J11 which are located near the top left of the main circuit board When the 4XTMF module is installed Jumper JP6 on the main circuit board must be cut to allow supervision of the module SLC 2LS Expander Module The SLC 2LS Expander Module allows expansion of the FACP from one SLC circuit to two SLC circuits The module plugs into connector J3 which is located in the lower right corner of the main circuit board The wiring for the second SLC connects to terminals located on the expander mod ule DACT UD2 Digital Alarm Communicator Transmitter The DACT UD2 is used to transmit system status to UL listed Central Station receivers via the public switched telephone network All circuitry and connectors are contained on a compact mod ule which plugs into connector J2 which is located near the bottom
125. ates 16 zones with 16 red alarm LEDs and 16 yellow trouble LEDs In Canada this module must be used to annunciate the fire alarm input points zones only ACM 32A Annunciator Control Module annunciates 32 alarm zones with 32 red LEDs In addition it has a System Trouble LED an On Line Power LED and a local piezo sounder It also has a switch for local piezo silence In Canada this module must be used to annunciate the fire alarm input points zones only AEM 32AF Annunciator Expander Module annunciates 32 alarm zones with 32 red LEDs In Canada this module must be used to annunciate the fire alarm input points zones only LCD 80F Remote Fire Annunciator The LCD 80F annunciator is an 80 character backlit LCD remote fire annunciator that is capable of displaying English language text Tactile switches provide remote system Acknowledge Silence Drill and Reset functions A keyswitch allows enabling disabling of the tactile switches Commu nications between the control panel and the annunciator is accomplished over a serial interface employing the E A 485 communication standard Up to 32 LCD 80F annunciators may be con nected to the EIA 485 circuit The annunciators may be powered from the host FACP or a remote UL listed filtered power supply such as the FCPS Series For more detailed information refer to the LCD 80F manual The LCD 80F is not for use in Canadian applications LCD 80FC Remote Fire Annunciator for use in Canadian appli
126. ation will be displayed as part of the device label on the display Pressing 2 while viewing Edit Control Screen 4 will cause the following screen to be displayed DESCRIPTION 1M66 2 HOUNSADJECTIVE OS Adjective Noun Screen A flashing cursor will appear at the first asterisk to the left The programmer can enter additional descriptive information about the device being programmed This information will appear on the display along with the standard device label information A maximum of 20 characters including spaces can be entered To enter alphanumeric characters from the keypad repeatedly press the appropriate key until the desired character is displayed in the first position For example to enter the letter B press the 2 ABC key three times to toggle through the characters A and B Press the right arrow key to move the cursor one position to the right and repeat the process to enter the next character To enter a space press the OZ key four times until a blank appears in the desired position When all characters have been entered press the Enter key to store the information The display will return to the Edit Control Screen 4 displaying the new information at the bottom of the screen Recall Increment Function In addition the user may use the Recall Increment function at any time when the cursor is on the first letter of the Adjective or Noun field as follows e If the zero key is pressed a 0 is placed in the firs
127. atures such as Disable Enable View and Clear History Walktest and System Time Change 3 3 Initial Power up The following sections describe the initial programming procedures for a new system The same procedures are used to modify programming in an existing system After completing the wiring of addressable devices to the SLC apply power to the control panel If the addressable devices have not yet been programmed into the FACP their LEDs will not flash and the following trouble message will be displayed TROUBL IH SYSTEM HO DEVICES INSTALLED BaB3A 6020410 3 4 Programming Screens Description The main options available when the Enter key is pressed are Read Status Programming Mode Each option has multiple functions or features which may be chosen To view all of the choices it 1s necessary that the programmer scroll through a number of additional subscreens These selec tions are displayed on multiple screens to make them more readable for the programmer Refer to Master Programming Level on page 65 for additional information on the various screens The title of the main option screen will always be displayed at the top of the subscreens for the pro grammer s convenience If additional subscreens exist an Up or Down arrow will be displayed in the upper right corner of the screen being viewed The programmer can then press the keypad Up or Down arrow key to view the new subscreen To select one of the choices in a scree
128. atus of the control panel The Read Status feature is not password protected Refer to Read Status on page 160 for a detailed description of this feature Pressing 2 will select user Programming which may only be accomplished by an authorized person After pressing 2 a screen will prompt for a password After entering the correct password the user may select from a list of programming options Pressing 3 will select Remote Download which allows the user to enable the remote programming option Refer to the DACT UD2 manual P N 53037 62 MS 9600LS Series Manual P N 52646 B2 2 12 2010 Initial Power up Programming Exit Programming or Read Status The programmer can exit Read Status or Programming mode by repeatedly pressing the keypad ESC Escape key until the display reads System All Normal Ten minutes of inactivity will also cause the FACP to exit Programming mode Note that the data which is entered during Program ming mode is not saved until the programmer exits this mode by repeatedly pressing the ESC key If the Reset key is pressed or power is lost before exiting Programming mode all data which was just entered will be lost User Programming Levels There are two user programming levels e User Master Program Level 1 is used for programming panel specific data relating to device types zoning messages control panel functions etc e User Maintenance Program Level 2 is used by a qualified operator to access fe
129. ble requires optional 411RK Relay Kit must be programmed as Trouble at the FACP The 411UDAC must be i programmed as a Slave Communicator programming address 64 set to 2 411UDAC J4 i lt a ge lt Monitor Module Circuit Input aa a a ra E 7 183 O me E If the SLC device does cord e a o 33 not match the one in this UL listed 2 2K ELRs P N 27070 figure refer to the SLC manual appendix which contains wiring conversion charts for type V and type gt T gt H modules o 3110 o Xl lw al oj 000000 Er 2 gt NCNO C NONC C a 3112 SLC Loop n lt Elo AC wiring for all Ale 411UDAC FACP must amr be connected to the o 12318123456 Hl o h a same branch circuit EEN ud Tema 187 5 JP8 a FACP Cops Bs mam mmm C a Figure C 1 Central Station Service Using 411UDAC 411UDAC FACP TB2 1 TB1 3 Alarm TB2 2 TB1 1 TB2 3 TB5 3 Trouble TB2 4 TB5 2 TB2 5 TB5 6 Supervisory TB2 8 TB5 4 Table C 1 411UDAC Connections to FACP 188 MS 9600LS Series Manual P N 52646 B2 2 12 2010 NFPA Standard Specific Requirements The following figure illustrates an example of Central Station Remote Station Reporting using a 411UD The relay contacts from the FACP may be used to trip any dialer UL listed for Central Station Remote Station Reporting Servi
130. ble option allows the programmer to select whether or not any installed ANN 80 annunciator must be unlocked by its key before any annunciator key presses will function Pressing 2 while viewing the ANN 80 Options Screen 1 causes the display to toggle between Lock Enable Yes annunciator must be unlocked for keys to function and Lock Enable No lock position is ignored The Acknowledge Button Enable ACK BTN ENABLE option allows the programmer to select whether the Ack Step button on any installed ANN 80 annunciator will function normally or always be ignored Pressing 3 while viewing the ANN 80 Options Screen 1 causes the display to toggle between Ack Bin Enable Yes Ack Step button functions normally and Ack Btn Enable No Ack Step button never functions The Silence Button Enable SIL BTN ENABLE option allows the programmer to select whether the Silence button on any installed ANN 80 annunciator will function normally or always be ignored Pressing while viewing the ANN 80 Options Screen 2 causes the display to toggle between Sil Btn Enable Yes Silence button functions normally and Sil Btn Enable No Silence button never functions The Reset Button Enable RST BTN ENABLE option allows the programmer to select whether the Reset button on any installed ANN 80 annunciator will function normally or always be ignored Pressing 2 while viewing the ANN 80 Options Screen 2 causes the display to toggle between Rst Btn Enable Yes Reset button
131. calls within a 24 hour period Central Station Screen 2 provides information on the Report Style Zone or Point as well as the Primary and Sec ondary Central Station programming which includes e Test Time Interval e Account Code 24 Hour Test Time e Phone Number e Communication Format Event Codes MS 9600LS Series Manual P N 52646 B2 2 12 2010 169 Operating Instructions Read Status 4 22 13 Service Terminal Pressing while viewing Read Status Screen 5 will display the following screens READ STATUS 1 SERVICE TERMINAL SPRINT PE SERVICE TERMINAL RING COUNT as Read Status Screen 5 Service Terminal Screen The Ring Count is displayed in the Service Terminal Screen A Ring Count value of 00 would indi cate that calling is disabled 4 22 14 Printer PC Pressing 2 while viewing Read Status Screen 5 will display the following screen PRINTER PC PRINTER PC PR4388 Printer PC Screen The display will inform the operator as to whether the control panel is configured for a printer or a PC and if the printer is supervised In the example above PR4800 indicates that the panel is con figured for a printer with a baud rate of 4800 and PR indicates that the printer is being supervised If NS appeared in place of PR it would indicate that the printer is not supervised 170 MS 9600LS Series Manual P N 52646 B2 2 12 2010 Read Status Operating Instructions 4 22 15 Print READ STATUS 1 S
132. cations The LCD 80FC is identical to the LCD 80F except for the tactile switches and keyswitch There is no keyswitch and tactile switches are provided for local silence and lamp test only No remote sys tem functions can be performed from the LCD 80FC annunciator LDM Series Lamp Driver Modules Graphic Annunciator The LDM Series Lamp Driver Modules which consist of the LDM 32F master and LDM E32F expander modules are used to provide an interface to a custom graphic LED annunciator 1 9 Getting Started The following is a brief summary of the minimal steps involved in bringing an MS 9600LS MS 9600UDES on line e Install Backbox Power Supply and Main Circuit Board refer to Mounting on page 42 e Address and Install Intelligent Devices refer to the SLC Wiring Manual 40 MS 9600LS Series Manual P N 52646 B2 2 12 2010 Getting Started Product Description Enter Autoprogramming refer to Autoprogram on page 66 e Resolve Programming Conflicts e Go to Point Program to Enter Specific Data refer to Point Program on page 67 Use the right and left arrow keys to navigate between devices MS 9600LS Series Manual P N 52646 B2 2 12 2010 41 Section 2 Installation The cabinet may be either semi flush or surface mounted The cabinet mounts using key slots and two 0 250 6 35 mm diameter holes located in the backbox The key slots are located at the top of the backbox and the two securing holes a
133. ccsi c5 c eosensases end eatee is ont oe ideageodasthdes E EE adeteseessiae 52 2 6 2 4XTMF Transmitter Module Installation eccccescessecseesseceeceseceeceseeeececeseeeeeeeeeaeeseeseeeaeenaeenseeaees 55 2 6 3 Auxiliary Trouble Input J16 amp Jl oceceececceescescesscescescecseeesecsecsaecseceaeesecseseeeneceseeeeeeaeesaecaeesaeeaeenaees 57 2 64 SEC 2LS Expander Module ai els AG Re Ae RR 57 2G Printer PG ese a Ae alltel O A E E E ENE 58 2 0 6 Annunciato Seea e sees E evi a Dee eevee ee ee E 59 Legacy ACM 8RF Relay Control Module s ssssssesseeessseseserseesseeesstsesstersseeseseestsressesessesesseereserseseses 59 Legacy ACM Series Annunciators nerna een a e E a a ia a S iS 60 MS 9600LS Series Manual P N 52646 B2 2 12 2010 Table of Contents Section Programming arena 61 3 12 Programming Datt Enty mc ico losa 61 3 2 Us r Programming enia iee RE he tesee REE R EAE E RE cn RE EKE Ei T R E 62 3 3 Anitial POVE U a E s e a a ds 63 3 4 Programming Screens Description iii ees sir EEEE E So E EE SEE S NE a 63 3 5 Programming and Passwords dente RAG Rie ak Aa o 63 3 6 Master Programming Er edite 65 SO AULO PTO Maa 66 E TR A Uae eee Tah cee eh dpe aka eed EE E cub beace E E act AE 67 Detector Pro MM A A we ee ees 67 Module Proa tt adi ei 78 SOLO idioma e ato da o a IAS 95 Enable 95 Dis dr E Eee ae aol 96 Zone 97 A NA 96 Zones Installed nennen es nn lt ol eat ae tet al pa 97 Zones Enable 97 Zone isa DIE ds a e on al
134. ces Note The Monitor Module input which is being used to monitor the 411UD Relay 2 Output programmed for DACT Trouble must be programmed as Trouble at FACP E Channel 2 w N E o my N Channel 4 2 2K ELR Monitor Module ELR resistor Relay Output DACT Trouble AASLAND COVAMERWN 2 ONONAON gt 00 411UD 4 oo FACP Supervisory Relay J4 Not Installed lt q Monitor Module Circuit Input FACP DAD EA T le Rel Z tO Sa 24 VDC rouble Relay Jane 5 If the SLC device does SST aS not match the one in this nonresettable figure refer to the SLC power FACP manual appendix which contains wiring conversion charts for type V and type H modules Alarm Relay 2 2K ELRs P N 27070 9600411u wmf Jom mmm C Cors JP6 O O 4XTMF OPT BD a FACP Figure C 2 FACP Connection to 411UD 411UD FACP Alarm TB2 1 TB1 1 TB2 2 TB1 3 Trouble TB2 3 TB5 2 TB2 4 TB5 3 Supervisory TB2 5 TB5 4 TB2 6 TB5 6 Table C 2 411 UD Connections to FACP MS 9600LS Series Manual P N 52646 B2 2 12 2010 189 NFPA Standard Specific Requirements NFPA 72 Auxiliary Fire Alarm System All connections are power limited and supervised This application is not suitable for separate transmission of sprinkler supervisory or trouble conditions Notes 1 2
135. ces are located on the other side of closed or partly open doors or are located on another floor of a building Any warning device may fail to alert people with a disability or those who have recently consumed drugs alcohol or medica tion Please note that e Strobes can under certain circumstances cause seizures in people with conditions such as epilepsy Studies have shown that certain people even when they hear a fire alarm signal do not respond or comprehend the meaning of the signal It is the property owner s responsi bility to conduct fire drills and other training exercise to make people aware of fire alarm signals and instruct them on the proper reaction to alarm signals In rare instances the sounding of a warning device can cause temporary or permanent hearing loss A fire alarm system will not operate without any electrical power If AC power fails the system will operate from standby batteries only for a specified time and only if the batteries have been properly maintained and replaced regularly Equipment used in the system may not be technically com patible with the control panel It is essential to use only equip ment listed for service with your control panel Telephone lines needed to transmit alarm signals from a premise to a central monitoring station may be out of service or temporarily disabled For added protection against tele phone line failure backup radio transmission systems are rec ommended
136. creen This display will show the system zones default and user programmed and their associated types Note that an up and or down arrow will appear in the upper right corner of the display indicating that additional screens of zone information exists Press the up or down arrow keys to view zones Z00 through Z99 Zone types can be changed by pressing the keypad number key corresponding to the zone in each Zones Installed Screen Available zone types will be displayed in the resultant screens For exam ple to change the zone type for zone Z02 in the screen illustrated above press 3 The following screens will be displayed OHNE TYPE PROG OHNE TYPE PROG 1 MONITOR 1 HEAT 2 5MOKE PHOTO 2 PULL STATION S WATERFLOW 3 DUCT Zone Type Program Screen 1 Zone Type Program Screen 2 OHNE TYPE PROG OHNE TYPE PROG 1 MEDICAL 1 SUPERVISORY 2 HAZARD 2 PROC MOH 3 TAMPER S SMOKE IDH 98 Zone Type Program Screen 3 Zone Type Program Screen 4 To change the zone type for Z02 to Pull Station scroll the display until Zone Type Program Screen 2 is displayed Press 2 to program zone Z02 as a Pull Station zone The display will return to the Zones Installed Screen showing zone Z02 and the Pull Station program type Repeat the procedure for each zone to be changed IMPORTANT In Zone Type Program Screen 1 selecting WATERFLOW will assign a Water flow silenceable zone type to the selected zone Any signaling devices programmed to t
137. criptive information about the device being programmed This information will appear on the display along with the standard device label information A maximum of 20 characters including spaces can be entered To enter alphanumeric characters from the keypad repeatedly press the appropriate key until the desired character is displayed in the first position For example to enter the letter B press the 2 ABC key three times to toggle through the characters 2 A and B Press the right arrow key to move the cursor one position to the right and repeat the process to enter the next character To enter a space press the OZ key four times until a blank appears in the desired position When all characters have been entered press the Enter key to store the information The display will return to the Edit Detector Screen 5 display ing the new information at the bottom of the screen Recall Increment Function In addition the user may use the Recall Increment function at any time when the cursor is on the first letter of the Description Adjective or Noun field as follows e Ifthe zero key is pressed a 0 is placed in the first letter position e Ifthe zero key is then pressed a second time with no intervening key actions the entire field is replaced with the field entered for the previous device programmed and the cursor moves to the last character of the field Recall function The Recalled Adjective or Noun field may now be changed letter
138. d to be sequential and can be set to any number between 0 and 08 Note that 00 is not a valid address The following table shows the DIP switch setting for each address NOTE Address ID Number DIP switches on some devices may have more than 5 switch positions Unless otherwise specified in the documentation supplied with each device switch positions 6 and above must be set to OFF MS 9600LS Series Manual P N 52646 B2 2 12 2010 Accessories Product Description Address Switch 51 Switch 4 Switch 3 Switch 2 Switch 1 not valid OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF 01 OFF OFF OFF OFF ON 02 OFF OFF OFF ON OFF 03 OFF OFF OFF ON ON 04 OFF OFF ON OFF OFF 05 OFF OFF ON OFF ON 06 OFF OFF ON ON OFF 07 OFF OFF ON ON ON 08 OFF ON OFF OFF OFF 1 Switch 5 must be set to OFF for ANN BUS devices to be recognized ANN 80 Remote Fire Annunciator The ANN 80 W Annunciator is a compact 80 character backlit LCD remote fire annunciator It mimics the display on the control panel and will annunciate device type point alarm trouble or supervisory condition zone assignment plus any custom alpha labels programmed into the FACP The annunciator also provides system status LEDs to display AC Power Alarm Trouble Supervi sory and Alarm Silenced conditions Additionally the annunciator is capable of remotely perform ing critical system functions such as Acknowledge Silence Reset and Drill Communication between the ANN
139. device installed the type of synchronization must be selected in this option Pressing 7 while viewing NAC Screen 4 will cause the following screen to be displayed HAC SYHC TYPE 1 5YSTEM SENSOR 2 WHEELOCK S GENTEX Pressing while viewing this screen will select System Sensor synchronization 2 will select Whee lock and 3 will select Gentex Maximum Number of Strobes for Synchronization The total current draw for each Notification Appliance Circuit cannot exceed 3 0 amps Refer to the manufacturer s documentation supplied with the Strobes to determine the maximum current draw for each strobe and ensure that the circuit maximum is not exceeded To ensure proper strobe and circuit operation there is also a limit to the number of strobes that can be attached to each circuit Following is a list of the strobes that have been tested with this FACP and the maximum number that can be connected to each NAC Make sure that the NAC maximum current is not exceeded e System Sensor 46 Strobes e Wheelock 42 Strobes e Gentex 39 Strobes Relays Pressing 3 while viewing System Setup Screen 2 allows the programmer to configure two of the main circuit board Form C relays from the following screen RELAYS 1 RELAY 1 Z RELAY 2 S RELAY 3 Relays Selection Screen MS 9600LS Series Manual P N 52646 B2 2 12 2010 Master Programming Level Programming To program Relay 1 or Relay 3 press the number corresponding to the se
140. device is Z00 for general alarm zone A flashing cursor will appear on the first O to the left Enter the two digit number corresponding to the zone that is to be assigned to this device The cursor moves to the next Z designation Continue entering zone assignments or the remaining zones can be left blank or programmed as general alarm zone Z00 When all desired changes have been made press the Enter key to store the zone assignments The display will return to the Edit Detector Screen 4 Note that the left and right arrow keys can be used to navigate through the zones and the CLEAR key can be used to quickly clear a zone Noun Adjective EDIT DETECTOR The Noun Adjective selection allows the programmer to enter specific descriptors about the detec 1 HOUNADJECTIVE tor currently being programmed Pressing 1 while viewing Edit Detector Screen 5 will cause the rie following screen to be displayed Edit Detector Screen 5 1 STANDARD ADJECTIVE 2 5TANDARD NOUN S CUSTOM ADJECTIVE 4 CUSTOM HOUN Noun Adjective Screen 74 MS 9600LS Series Manual P N 52646 B2 2 12 2010 1 STANDARO ADJECTIVE 4 CUSTOM HOUN Noun Adjective Screen Master Programming Level Programming EEPE EEE AE et 1 HORTH 2 S0OUTH S EAST Adjective Screen 1 See et 1 REAR 2 UPPER S LOWER Adjective Screen 3 SESE 1 3RD 2 4TH S 3TH Adjective Screen 5 SE Et 1 FLODR4 2 FLOORS 3 RO00M Adjective Screen 7 MS 9600LS Series
141. dio communications It has been tested and found to comply with the limits for class A computing devices pursuant to Subpart B of Part 15 of FCC Rules which is designed to provide reasonable protection against such interference when devices are operated in a commercial environment Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause interfer ence in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his or her own expense Like all solid state electronic devices this system may operate erratically or can be damaged when subjected to light ning induced transients Although no system is completely immune from lightning transients and interference proper grounding will reduce susceptibility Overhead or outside aerial wiring is not recommended due to an increased susceptibility to nearby lightning strikes Consult with the Technical Ser vices Department if any problems are anticipated or encoun tered Disconnect AC power and batteries prior to removing or inserting circuit boards Failure to do so can damage circuits Remove all electronic assemblies prior to any drilling filing reaming or punching of the enclosure When possible make all cable entries from the sides or rear Before making modifi cations verify that they will not interfere with battery trans former or printed circuit board location Do not tighten screw terminals more than 9 in lbs Over tightening may damage threads re
142. e 4 For HVAC RESTART and HVAC OVRRIDE descriptions refer to Monitor Module Operation on page 198 MS 9600LS Series Manual P N 52646 B2 2 12 2010 83 Programming Master Programming Level EDIT MONITOR 1 PRE SIGHAL Edit Monitor Screen 3 EDIT MONITOR 1 WALKTEST 2 2Z0NE ASSIGNMENT Ba Edit Monitor Screen 4 EDIT MONITOR 1 NOUN ADJECTIVE 2 DESCRIPTION PEERS EEE EEE EET Edit Monitor Screen 5 84 Pre signal To enable the Pre signal feature press while viewing Edit Monitor Screen 3 until the display reads Pre signal Yes Each press of the key will cause the display to toggle between Pre signal Yes and Pre signal No Refer to Presignal on page 158 for additional information Walktest The Walktest feature allows one person to test the system devices without the necessity of manually resetting the control panel after each device activation To enable devices which are connected to a monitor module for the Walktest feature press 7 while viewing the Edit Monitor Screen 4 until the display reads Walktest Yes Each press of the key will cause the display to toggle between Walktest Yes and Walktest No Refer to Walktest on page 160 for additional information Zone Assignment A maximum of five zones can be programmed to each addressable monitor module Pressing 2 while viewing Edit Monitor Screen 4 displays the following screen MON ZONE ASSIGH 96 gtt ytt a
143. e 2 All annunciator LEDs on 3 LDM 32F with LEDs on 4 If using the Reverse Polarity Alarm output add 0 005 amps if using the Reverse Polarity Trouble output add another 0 005 amps 5 Refer to the Device Compatibility Document for standby current 6 Must use compatible listed Power Supervision Relay 7 Maximum alarm current for each sounder base is 0 015 amps which must be supplied by aux 24VDC source 8 Current limitation of Terminal TB4 circuits is 3 00 amps per NAC 9 The total standby current must include both the resettable TB3 Terminals 1 amp 2 and nonresettable TB3 Terminals 3 amp 4 5 amp 6 power Caution must be taken to ensure that current drawn from these outputs during alarm does not exceed maximum ratings specified Current limitations of TB3 circuits is 3 0 amps per output 10 Total current draw listed above cannot exceed 7 0 amps in alarm 176 MS 9600LS Series Manual P N 52646 B2 2 12 2010 Calculating the Battery Size Power Supply Calculations 5 4 Calculating the Battery Size Use Table 5 4 to calculate the total Standby and Alarm load in ampere hours AH This total load determines the battery size in AH required to support the control panel under the loss of AC power Complete Table 5 4 as follows 1 Enter the totals from Table 5 3 on page 176 Calculation Columns 2 and 3 where shown 2 Enter the NFPA Standby and Alarm times refer to NFPA Requirements below 3 Calculate the ampere hours fo
144. e Date Screen 2 will cause the following screens to be displayed DAYLIGHT SAVINGS 1 EMABLED YES 2 5TART MONTH MAR S START WEEK WEEK 2 Daylight Savings Screen 1 DAYLIGHT SAVINGS jj 1 END MONTH HOW 2 END WEEK WEEK 1 Daylight Savings Screen 2 Pressing while viewing Daylight Savings Screen 1 will cause the display to toggle between Enabled Yes and Enabled No The control panel will automatically update the time for daylight savings time when Enabled Yes is selected Pressing 2 while viewing Daylight Savings Screen 1 will display another screen which allows the programmer to select the month that daylight savings time will begin In this sub screen pressing 1 will select March 2 will select April and 3 will select May Pressing 3 while viewing Daylight Savings Screen 1 will display two sub screens which allow the programmer to select the week of the month that daylight savings time will begin In the first sub screen pressing will select the first week 2 will select the second week and 3 will select the third week while in the second sub screen pressing will select the fourth week and 2 will select the last week of the selected month Pressing while viewing Daylight Savings Screen 2 will display another screen which allows the programmer to select the month that daylight savings time will end In this sub screen pressing will select September 2 will select October and 3 will select November
145. e E E ERE ELE R E R 177 MS 9600LS Series Manual P N 52646 B2 2 12 2010 7 Table of Contents 5 42 Selecting and Locating Batteries e aia 177 Appendix A Software ZONES civccicinoiniinncicanesinossicna dr canoa nadaa 178 A boty NEEE A E OEEO E 178 Appendix B Default Programming siscasceiniicesesssetsccccasceuanecacdueussvesatnaseacdsceciacrsasadesuciecadaniateeks 186 Appendix C NFPA Standard Specific Requirements c ecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 187 C 1 Central Station Remote Station Transmitter Connection to FACP Dry Contacts 0 0 0 cccesseeseeteeteeeeees 193 C 2 MBT 1 Municipal Box Trip Silenceable oooononncnnnnincninninccnonconconnonncononononnocononnnonn ron rancio nn non nron rro rca nrnn nos 194 Appendix D FACP with Keltron wis ceiiccaisicisssesesiieeadivsssscecasdsavesivsevaseuienccdenssevievsssiedssiversbacsis 195 Appendix E Wire Requirements ooocoocccnnnonncennccnnnnnncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nn 196 E NAO Wari a nd a oo ea dl e e e o aoe O 197 Appendix F HVAC Control sss isiciscvsssccvecsaiscicecsiensddcensacustvcscvvessvessvensiventessvavavpsvedsasaissavtoeatecess 198 Fl Control Module Operation seemne nnn aE it AMIR A ea esos 198 Ed FAV AC SHU TDN lt A te ie tag 198 F 2 Monitor Module Operation e r arara a a aaa partens Eaa anaona 198 F2 F HVAC RESTAR rie a E E O ire 198 F22 AVAC OVRRIDE ist E E Wise Saget TE chen tutes TE OAE EEE OAE 199 Appendix G Canadian ApplicatiON
146. e The piezo to pulse 1 second On and 1 second Off The system Trouble LED to flash one second On and one second Off e The trouble relay to activate e TROUBL with device type noun adjective address and trouble description will appear on the LCD display The same message along with the time and date is sent to the history buffer and optional printer e Terminate upload or download communications Note that specific troubles will initiate additional actions for example loss of AC power will turn off the AC Power LED a ground fault will turn on the Ground LED etc Addressable Smoke Detectors Monitor Modules and Control Modules For addressable devices connected to the SLC loop the following is a typical message that could appear on the LCD display for a device trouble TROUBL SMOKE PHOTOS ADJ lt NOUH gt INVREP 16 66A 816318 106611 The information displayed in the above example provides the following information e First line in display The type of event in this example TROUBL indicating a device trouble Device type identifier in this example SMOKE PHOTO indicates a Photoelectric smoke detector Other device type identifiers which can be displayed include SMOKE ION for Ionization Detector HEAT for Heat Detector CONTROL for Control Module and MONITOR for Monitor Module PULL STATION for a manual pull box etc Refer to Edit Detector on page 69 Edit Module Screen for Monitor Module on page 79
147. e any other programma ble alarm type The information displayed in the above example provides the following information e First line in display The type of event in this example ALARM indicating an alarm condition Device type identifier in this example PULL STATION indicates a manual pull box Other device type identifiers which can be displayed include SMOKE ION for Ionization Detector HEAT for Heat Detector CONTROL for Control Module and MONITOR for Monitor Module PULL STATION for a manual pull box etc Refer to Edit Detector on page 69 Edit Module Screen for Monitor Module on page 79 and Edit Module Screen for Control Modules on page 88 for information on additional device types e Second line in display lt ADJ gt refers to the user programmed adjective descriptor from library list resident in the control panel or custom entry via PC lt NOUN gt refers to the user programmed noun descriptor from library list resident in the control panel or custom entry via PC e Third line in display Z000 indicates the zone programmed to this device which in this example is general alarm Zone 000 Note that a single device can be programmed to five different zones but only the first zone will be displayed Fourth line in display Time the current time in this example is 0 00A which represents 10 00 AM Date the current month day and year in this example is 0 for January 08 for the
148. e corresponding keyboard number key The display will return to Edit Detector Screen 2 and indicate the selection next to the Type option NOTE Ifa detector is selected as a SUPERV DUCTP type it will function like a supervisory point nota fire alarm point The supervisory LED and supervisory relay will activate not the fire alarm LED or alarm relay if smoke is sensed Verification Alarm verification is used to confirm that a smoke detector activation is a true alarm condition and not a false alarm This feature is selected by pressing 3 while viewing the Edit Detector Screen 2 so that the display reads Verification On Each time the 3 key is pressed the display will toggle between Verification On and Verification Off For a detailed description refer to Alarm Verifica tion on page 159 Walktest The Walktest feature allows one person to test the system devices without the necessity of manually EDIT DETECTOR resetting the control panel after each device activation To enable a device for the Walktest feature 1 WALKTEST SBAS press while viewing the Edit Detector Screen 3 until the display reads Walktest Yes Each press 3 PRE SIGHAL of the key will cause the display to toggle between Walktest Yes and Walktest No Refer to Walk test on page 160 PAS Edit Detector Screen 3 The PAS Positive Alarm Sequence option will program the detector to delay panel activation including alarm relay and communicator f
149. e fea tures as the MS 9600LS but is supplied standard with a DP 9692 dress panel Refer to Canadian Option on page 113 for a full description The MS 9600LSE and MS 9600UDLSE offer the same features as the MS 9600LS and MS 9600UDLS but allow connection to 220 240 VAC input NOTE Unless otherwise specified the terms FACP MS 9600LS and MS 9600UDLS are used in this manual to refer to all versions of the FACPs 1 1 Inventory When the FACP shipment is received check to make certain that all parts have been included in the shipment The FACP shipment should consist of one of each of the following main circuit board with display e FLPS 7 Power Supply e chassis with main circuit board and power supply mounted backbox with door and dress panel e plastic bag containing screws cables key etc e manual 1 2 Features and Options e New LiteSpeed polling protocol for faster SLC response time e SLC operates up to 10 000 ft 3 000 m in LiteSpeed mode with twisted unshielded wire or 3 000 ft 900 m with untwisted unshielded wire e Single standard addressable SLC loop which meets NFPA Style 4 6 and 7 requirements MS 9600LS Series Manual P N 52646 B2 2 12 2010 13 Product Description Features and Options Optional module for adding a second SLC loop which meets NFPA Style 4 6 and 7 requirements 318 addressable device capacity for each SLC loop 159 detectors and 159 control monitor modules 99
150. e or Acknowledge key is pressed The piezo will continue to sound at these rates until the alarm or trouble condition is cleared If the trouble condition is not cleared within 24 hours the panel will reactivate the trouble sounder and retransmit the trouble condition to the central station if connected Banner This option allows the user to change the top line of the LCD display from the blank factory default readout to a user defined readout when the control panel is in Normal condition e Time Date This feature allows the programmer to set the time display format 24 hr or 12 hr date and daylight savings time feature into the FACP memory Timers This option allows the programmer to set the PAS Positive Alarm Sequence time delay Pre Signal time delay and Waterflow time delay e NACs This feature allows the programmer to configure the control panel Notification Appliance Circuits for a variety of options such as circuit type silenceable nonsilenceable autosilence coding silence inhibit zone assignment and enable disable e Relays This option allows programming of two onboard relays for activation by various control panel events such as alarm trouble supervisory etc e Canadian Option This option allows the automatic programming of the FACP to Canadian specifications refer to Canadian Option on page 113 Important For Canadian Applications this option must be set to ON prior to any other panel programming
151. ecall Increment Function 77 87 94 Relay 16 19 47 112 connections 47 contact rating 16 19 47 fixed 47 Form C 16 112 programmable 14 19 47 programming 113 selections 113 trouble 14 19 47 Relay Control Module see also ACM 8RF 59 Relay options 100 Remote Programming 62 Remote Station Service 56 remote switch functions 14 MS 9600LS Series Manual P N 52646 B2 2 12 2010 Reset 18 150 Resettable Power 18 47 89 current 47 see also Smoke Detector Power 16 S Secondary Power Requirements 177 sensitivity 157 172 see also smoke detector sensitivity 157 Signal rate 14 Signaling Line Circuit see also SLC 15 Silence Inhibit 14 112 159 silenceable control module 90 NAC 109 waterflow 98 100 114 Silenceable Alarm Relay 113 silenceable circuits synchronized signals 109 Silenceable waterflow 148 SLC 13 15 18 current 15 reference manual 15 resistance 15 see also Signaling Line Circuit 13 Style 18 voltage 15 wiring length 15 SLC Loop Protocol 100 SLC loop selection 67 SLC Style 99 SLC 2 57 installation 57 wiring 58 SLC 2 Expander Module 21 smoke detector chamber reading 171 data 157 171 sensitivity 157 Smoke Detector Power current 16 smoke detector sensitivity 14 Software Zones 14 178 sounder 18 Specifications 15 strobe synchronization 14 Style 13 Style Y 47 NAC wiring 49 NC configuration 48 Style Z 47 NAC configuration 48 wiring 49 subscreen 63 supervise 205 Index 206 Phone
152. ect the type of monitor module being programmed by pressing the corresponding keypad number key The display will return to the Edit Monitor Screen 2 which will show the new type selection Table 3 1 lists the Monitor Types and their respective functions MS 9600LS Series Manual P N 52646 B2 2 12 2010 Master Programming Level Programming Monitor module type selection will affect the function of the point as follows Monitor Type Action When Activated Pull Station Fire Alarm User Defined 1 same as previous Pull Station Waterflow Fire Alarm Delayed User Defined 2 same as previous Waterflow Monitor Fire Alarm User Defined 3 same as previous Monitor Future not used Future not used Smoke Conventional Fire Alarm User Defined 5 same as previous Smoke Conventional Heat Conventional Fire Alarm User Defined 6 same as previous Heat Detector Medic Alert2 Supervisory latching User Defined 7 same as previous Medic Alert Hazard Alert Supervisory latching User Defined 8 same as previous Hazard Alert Tornado Alert Supervisory latching User Defined 9 same as previous Tornado Alert Phone Active Phone LCD display only User Defined 10 same as previous Phone Tamper Supervisory nonlatching tracking User Defined 11 same as previous Tamper Supervisory Supervisory latching User
153. ed to a module with this type code are unsupervised To program this feature in the FACP e Program the HVAC SHUTDN type code to the control module which will be used to shut down the fans refer to Type under the section titled Edit Module Screen for Control Modules on page 88 e Program the control module to a software zone and program alarm input devices which when activated are to cause fan shutdown to the same software zone refer to Zone Assignment under the section titled Edit Module Screen for Control Modules on page 88 e Monitor the control module using an addressable monitor module programmed for Trouble Monitor The monitor module label should be programmed to indicate HVAC SHUTDOWN When the control module is active HVAC SHUTDN the monitor module will indicate a trouble condition at the FACP and the display should indicate the HVAC is shut down Once activated the HVAC SHUTDN control module remains activated even if the FACP is silenced or reset After the alarm condition on the FACP has been cleared and the panel reset the HVAC SHUTDN control module remains activated and the fans remain off The monitor module programmed for Trouble Monitor which is being used to supervise the control module will indicate a trouble condition at the control panel and the LCD should display that the HVAC is shut down The fans can only be restarted when the HVAC SHUTDN control module is deactivated by the HVAC RESTART module F 2
154. ed to the FACP EIA 485 ANN BUS communication circuit Compatible devices include ANN 80 LCD Annunciator ANN S PG Serial Parallel Printer Interface Module ANN I O LED Driver Module ANN LED Annunciator Module alarm trouble supervisory LEDs ANN RLED Annunciator Module red alarm LEDs only ANN RLY Relay Module ANN BUS Wiring This section contains information on calculating ANN BUS wire distances and the types of wiring configurations Class B m Calculating Wiring Distance for ANN BUS Modules The following instructions will guide the installer in determining the type of wire and the maximum wiring distance that can be used with FACP ANN BUS accessory modules To calculate the wire gauge that must be used to connect ANN BUS modules to the FACP it is nec essary to calculate the total worst case current draw for all modules on a single 4 conductor bus The total worst case current draw is calculated by adding the individual worst case currents for each module The individual worst case values are shown in the following table Model Number Worst Case Current Draw ANN 80 LCD Annunciator 0 040 amps ANN S PG Serial Parallel Printer Interface Module 0 040 amps ANN I O LED Driver Module 0 200 amps ANN R LED Annunciator Module 0 068 amps ANN RLY Relay Module 0 075 amps 1 Total worst case current draw on a single ANN BUS cannot exceed 0 5 amp If current draw exceeds 0 5 amps refer to Powering A
155. ee also zone Z00 74 main circuit mounting 42 ground fault 59 Maintenance Alert 14 156 levels 172 maintenance alert 172 H Maintenance Program Level 2 63 138 Hazard Condition 155 Manual programming 62 History 115 Master Program Level 1 63 65 erase 115 Medical Alert 156 Maintenance Level 140 Mode key 64 view events 115 Module History file 14 add 78 HVAC Control 198 addressing 20 HVAC OVRRIDE 199 delete 79 HVAC RESTART 198 edit monitor 79 HVAC SHUTDN 198 enable disable 81 see also addressable modules 20 Module Programming 78 Indicators 17 Monitor module 20 A adjective 85 e enable disable 81 noun 86 Inventory 13 noun adjective 84 INVREP 172 type 82 type action 83 K Type list 82 Key Panel 18 type selection 83 function keys 18 Mounting service program keys 18 cabinet 42 keyboard and keypad 61 main circuit board 42 Keypad Display municipal box transmitter removal and installation 51 see also 4XTMF module 55 L N lamp test 18 NAC 15 19 107 157 LCD display 14 17 Auto Silence 110 LCD 80F annunciator 14 40 coded 157 LDM Series annunciator 40 coding 110 LDM 32 Graphic Annunciator 14 current 16 LED End of Line Resistor 16 AC Power 150 power 14 Alarm Silenced 151 see also Notification Appliance Circuit 14 Battery 151 47 Disabled 151 silence inhibit 112 Fire Alarm 150 silenceable 109 Ground 151 Style configuration 48 Style Y wiring diagram 49 MS 9600LS Series Manual P N 52646 B2 2 12 2010 203 Index 204 synchronized 157
156. eeteees 27 ANN S PG Serial Parallel Interface Installation cccecccescesseescesceeeceseeseecseeeeecaeceaecsecaecseeesenseeeteeas 30 ANNO LED Driver Module ii st 32 ANN LED Annunciator Module ccccccecceccesseesceseessecseeesecaeesaecseceeceaeceeeaeeseceseeneceseeaeecaesaeeaeenseeaeees 34 ANN RLY Annunciator Module cccccceccecseessesseesceseecsecscecaecsaeseseeceeeseecneceeeeaeeseecseeseecaeceeeeaeenesneeees 36 ANN BUS Audio Panel Control miii aia 38 1877 Legacy ACS Annunciators A ad 40 1 9 Getting Started A a do 40 Secti n 2 Installation iaa dd 42 DV O td es 42 2 2 NN 46 2 2 1 AC Power and Earth Ground Connection ccccescesccesceseeeseesceseeeseeseecaeceaeeceneecseseeceeeeeeseeeeneeeeaees 46 22 25 Battery POWE orione aeieeiaii 46 2 2 3 Special Application DC Power Output Connection ccceccecseessessecsceeseceeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeceseeneeeaeeneeenees 47 O SN 47 2 4 Notification Appliance Circuits ccccccscceeescesseescescescecsecaceesecsaeeecesesseseceseseseeseeeaecaeecaessaecsecseceseeesseesereaes 47 2 41 Configuring NA C OR c chce ees ea aici SRN AIS Bed dde peca 48 2 4 2 Style Y Class B NAC Wiring E E E E E E E 49 24 3 Style Z Clas ALNAC WII on 49 2 5 Power limited Wiring Requirement ccccessescesseescesceeseesceseecsececesaeceeceaeceeseseseeeeceaeeeaeeaeecaeeaeeneeneerenes 50 2 6 Optional Modules and Device cia dea eat ek enti 51 2 6 1 DACT UD2 Installation cs cs
157. en 1 m Type The main circuit board NAC type can be programmed by pressing 2 while viewing NAC Screen 1 The following screen will be displayed Press the down arrow key to view additional screens HAC TYPE 1 BELL 2 HORH 3 5TROBE Type Screen 1 Select the NAC device type by pressing the number corresponding to the type in the appropriate screen When the selection is made the display will return to NAC Screen 1 The following table contains NAC type codes and their functions NAC Type Code Special Function Bell None Horn None Strobe None Synced Strobe Synchronized to manufacturer Strobe Sil Sync Same as Synced Strobe but Silence turns off audible 8 visual devices Future Use None Future Use None Future Use None Blank None m Silenceable Pressing 3 while viewing NAC Screen 1 will cause the display to change to Silenceable No This will prevent the selected main circuit board NAC from being silenced by pressing the Alarm Silence key or by the Auto Silence feature Each press of the 3 key will cause the display to toggle between Silenceable Yes and Silenceable No Important When a Notification Appliance Circuit with a mix of audible and visual devices is programmed for silenceable and the Synced Strobe feature is selected only the audible devices will be turned off if the Silence key is pressed The visual devices strobes etc will continue to operate If the Strobe Sil
158. en 3 EDIT MONITOR ieiz 1 1 WALEK TEST YES 2 Z0NE ASSIGNMENT Ae Edit Monitor Screen 4 EDIT MONITOR iM iz 1 AD JECTIWE HOUN 2 DESCRIPTI N SEE Ett Edit Monitor Screen 5 Enable Disable Module To Enable or Disable the monitor module press the key while viewing the Edit Module Screen 2 Each press of the key will toggle the screen between Enabled Yes and Enabled No If Enabled No is selected the module will not be polled by the control panel preventing the module from reporting alarms and troubles to the panel The control panel will indicate a system trouble condi tion and the Disable LED with turn on if any devices are disabled MS 9600LS Series Manual P N 52646 B2 2 12 2010 81 Programming Master Programming Level EDIT MONITOR 1 ENABLED 2 TYPE MONITOR Edit Monitor Screen 2 82 Type Monitor The FACP response to the activation of a user defined type is the same as most previous standard types in the list thus allowing a variety of user defined types and responses To select the type of monitor module being programmed press the 2 key while viewing the Edit Monitor Screen 2 This will cause the control panel to display the following Monitor Type Screens MONITOR TYPE 1 PULL STATION 2 USER DEFINED 1 S WATERFLOW Monitor Type Screen 1 Pressing the down arrow key will display additional Monitor Type screens While viewing one of the Monitor Type screens sel
159. eries Manual P N 52646 B2 2 12 2010 175 Power Supply Calculations Calculating the System Current Draw Table 5 3 contains columns for calculating current draws For each column calculate the current and enter the total in amperes in the bottom row When finished copy the totals from Calculation Column 2 and Calculation Column 3 to Table 5 4 on page 177 Calculation Column 1 Calculation Column 2 Calculation Column 3 Primary Non Fire Alarm Current amps Primary Fire Alarm Current amps Secondary Non Fire Alarm Current amps Device Type Qty X current draw Total Qty X current draw Total Qty X current draw Total Main Circuit Board 1 X 0 160 0 160 1 X 0 253 0 253 1 X 0 103 0 103 ANN 80 X 0 037 X 0 040 X 0 015 ANN R LED X 0 028 X 0 068 X 0 028 ANN RLY X 0 015 X 0 075 X 0 015 ANN 1 0 X 0 035 X 0 200 X 0 035 ANN S PG X 0 045 X 0 045 X 0 045 ACM 8RF X 0 030 X 0 158 X 0 030 ACM 16ATF X 0 040 X 0 056 X 0 040 ACM 32AF AEM 16ATF X 0 002 X 0 018 X 0 002 AEM 32AF AFM 16ATF X 0 040 X 0 056 X 0 040 AFM 32AF AFM 16AF X 0 025 X 0 065 X 0 025 DACT UD2 1 X 0 020 X 0 029 X 0 017 LDM 32F X 0 040 X 0 056 X 0 040 LDM E32F X 0 002 X 0
160. escription NAC Notification Appliance Circuits Up to four NACs are provided with various programmable features e four Style Y Class B NACs OR two Style Z Class A NACs Relays One fixed and two fully programmable Form C dry contact relays are provided The fixed fail safe relay monitors system trouble and the two programmable relays are factory default programmed for system alarm and system supervisory Contacts are rated 2 0 amps 30 VDC resistive and 0 5 amps 30 VAC resistive The programmable relays can be programmed for the following oper ations e fire alarm e trouble e supervisory supervisory auto resettable e DACT communication failure e process monitor e process monitor auto resettable e hazard alert e medical alert e AC loss Auxiliary Trouble Inputs Auxiliary Trouble Inputs can be connected to trouble bus outputs from auxiliary equipment such as power supplies or normally open dry contacts of a trouble relay to allow monitoring by the FACP 1 6 Components Main Circuit Board The main circuit board contains the system s CPU and other primary components and wiring inter face connectors Optional modules plug in and are mounted to the main circuit board The circuit board is delivered mounted to a chassis which must be mounted to the backbox Refer to the circuit board illustration on Page 10 FLPS 7 Power Supply The FLPS 7 Power Supply is provided as a separate module which is delivered mounted to a c
161. ess Holes Figure 2 10 Keypad Display Removal 51 Installation Optional Modules and Devices 52 2 6 1 DACT UD2 Installation WARNING RISK OF ELECTRICAL SHOCK AND EQUIPMENT DAMAGE DISCONNECT ALL SOURCES OF POWER AC AND DC BEFORE INSTALLING OR REMOVING ANY MODULES OR WIRING The DACT UD2 Digital Alarm Communicator Transmitter which is supplied standard with the MS 9600UDLS E transmits system status to UL listed Central Station receivers via the public switched telephone network It is capable of reporting up to 99 software zones or up to 636 addressable points Two modular phone jacks labeled PRI for Primary phone line and SEC for Secondary phone line allow easy connection of two independent telephone lines to the DACT UD2 The following functions have been incorporated into the DACT UD2 Line Seizure takes control of phone lines disconnecting any premises phones Off On Hook performs on and off hook status to the phone lines Listen for dial tone 440 hertz tone typical in most networks Dialing Central Station s number default is Touch Tone programmable to rotary For tone burst or touchtone type formats determine proper Acknowledge and Kissoff tone s the frequency and time duration of the tone s varies with the transmission format The control panel will adjust accordingly Communicate in the following formats e Ademco Contact ID e SIA The DACT UD2 module plugs into connector J2 on the F
162. et MS 9600LS Series Manual P N 52646 B2 2 12 2010 177 Appendix A Software Zones A 1 Correlations 178 Setup and configuration of an addressable system is different than a conventional system In a conventional system assignment of input devices smoke detectors pull stations heat detectors etc to zones is accomplished through wiring The wiring is direct from clearly marked panel terminals to any device assigned to a particular zone Connection of output devices horns bells strobes etc in a conventional system is accomplished by direct wiring of the output devices to Notification Appliance Circuit terminals In an addressable system a minimum of a single pair of wires SLC communication loop is used to connect all addressable input and output devices Communications between the FACP Fire Alarm Control Panel and all addressable devices takes place over the wire pair which originates from the FACP Software programming is used to configure the system as opposed to direct wiring Zone assignments are created via software means hence the term software zones Setup of an FACP software zone is accomplished by panel programming Each addressable device can be assigned to a maximum of five software zones Each software zone however may have from 1 to 99 addressable input devices assigned to it and from 1 to 99 addressable output devices assigned to it Monitor and control modules comprise one group of 99 addresses with e
163. et Example MS 9600LS Series Manual P N 52646 B2 2 12 2010 Correlations Software Zones MONITOR CONTROL MODULE ZONE ASSIGNMENT Address Device Type Zone ADJINOUN Address Device Zens ADJ NOUN Number Type Number 01 MMF 300 1 51 02 MMF 302 1 2 52 03 MMF 302 1 2 53 04 MMF 302 3 54 05 CMF 300 1 55 06 CMF 300 1 56 07 CMF 300 1 57 08 CMF 300 2 58 09 CMF 300 112 3 59 10 CMF 300 2 60 T CMF 300 3 61 12 CMF 300 3 62 13 CMF 300 1 63 14 64 15 65 16 66 17 67 18 68 19 69 20 70 21 71 22 72 23 73 24 74 25 75 26 76 27 77 28 78 29 79 30 80 31 81 32 82 33 83 34 84 35 85 36 86 37 87 38 88 39 89 40 90 41 91 42 92 43 93 44 94 45 95 46 96 47 97 48 98 49 99 50 100 Table A 2 Module Programming Sheet Example MS 9600LS Series Manual P N 52646 B2 2 12 2010 181 Software Zones Correlations DETECTOR ZONE ASSIGNMENT Address Device zene ADJ NOUN Address Device zene ADJ NOUN Type Number Type Number 01 51 02 52 03 53 04 54 05 55 06 56 07 57 08 58 09 59 10 60 11 61 12 62 13 63 14 64 15 65 16 66 17 67 18 68 19 69 20 70 21 71 22 72 23 73 24 74 25
164. etector in this example Z001 e Program an output such as a control module that is to be activated by detector 005 by assigning the same zone to it in this example Z001 Program an output such as a control module for Pre signal activation by assigning zone 798 to it This control module may be connected to a signaling device used to indicate a Pre signal condition do not use a Notification Appliance Circuit for this purpose Enable zones Z001 and Special Purpose Zone Pre signal 98 and set the Pre signal delay timer to some value With the preceding program settings when the detector with address 005 is activated zone Z98 will cause its associated control module to activate immediately sounding the connected signaling device to indicate the Pre signal condition Following the Pre signal delay time zone Z001 will cause its associated control module to activate and the control panel will initiate an alarm condition Note that a detector can be enabled for either PAS or Pre signal but not both Zone Assignment A maximum of five zones can be programmed to each addressable detector Pressing while view ing Edit Detector Screen 4 displays the following screen ONE ASSIGHMENT Za Zt qe ge qu Zone Assignment Screen MS 9600LS Series Manual P N 52646 B2 2 12 2010 73 Programming Master Programming Level Note that Z represents the Zone Number s corresponding to this device The factory default for an unprogrammed
165. functions normally and Rst Btn Enable No Reset button never func tions The Drill Button Enable DRL BTN ENABLE option allows the programmer to select whether the Drill button on any installed ANN 80 annunciator will function normally or always be ignored Pressing 3 while viewing the ANN 80 Options Screen 2 causes the display to toggle between Drl Btn Enable Yes Drill button functions normally and Dri Btn Enable No Drill button never func tions MS 9600LS Series Manual P N 52646 B2 2 12 2010 133 Programming Master Programming Level OPTION MODULES 1 ANNUNCIATORS UDACT 0N BOARD DACT PRINTER PC HO Option Module Screen 134 On Board DACT The Onboard DACT Digital Alarm Communicator Transmitter provides communication to a Central Station Pressing 2 while viewing the Option Module Screen will allow programming of the Onboard DACT Refer to the DACT UD2 Installation and Programming Manual Document 53037 for detailed information on installing and programming this option Printer PC A Printer or a PC can be connected to the control panel Pressing 3 while viewing the Option Mod ule Screen will cause the following screen to appear PRINTER PC 1 PRINTER HO SU HO 2 PRINTER SU YES 3 PC HO Printer PC Screen Pressing while viewing the Printer PC Screen will program the control panel for an unsupervised NO SU printer The display will change to the Printer Baud Rate Screen as shown below Pres
166. ggle between Pre signal 98 On and Pre signal 98 Off When Zone 98 is pro grammed On a Pre signal activation of any device will cause Zone 98 to activate By assigning Zone 98 to a control module in the Programming Zone Assignment Screen an output device con nected to the control module can be used to indicate a Pre signal condition in the control panel Do not assign Zone 98 to a Notification Appliance Circuit when using this zone to indicate a Pre signal condition Pressing 3 will cause the display to change to Two Stage 99 On Each press of the 3 key will cause the display to toggle between Two Stage 99 On and Two Stage 99 Off Refer to Two Stage Opera tion on page 111 for a description of this feature 96 MS 9600LS Series Manual P N 52646 B2 2 12 2010 Master Programming Level Programming Zones Installed ZONE SETUP 1520NES INSTALLED Pressing for Zones Installed while viewing Zone Setup Screen 2 will display a screen similar to 2 Z0NES ENABLED S Z0NES DISABLED the following Zone Setup Screen 2 ONES INSTALLED 66 al 62 63 64 BS Zones Installed Screen This display will show all of the zones that have been programmed into the control panel Note that an up and or down arrow may appear in the upper right corner of the display indicating that addi tional screens of zone information exists Press the up or down arrow keys to view the additional zones Zones Enabled Pressing 2 for Zones Enabled whi
167. gth total loop feet feet Amps ist resistance AWG 12 AWG 14 AWG 16 AWG 18 AWG12 AWG 14 AWG 16 AWG 18 ohms solid solid solid solid solid solid solid solid 0 25 12 72 3295 2072 1301 819 1648 1036 650 409 0 5 6 36 1648 1036 650 409 824 518 325 205 0 75 4 24 1098 691 434 273 549 345 217 136 1 3 18 824 518 325 205 412 259 163 102 1 25 2 54 659 414 260 164 330 207 130 82 1 5 2 12 549 345 217 136 275 173 108 68 1 75 1 82 471 296 186 117 235 148 93 58 2 1 59 412 259 163 102 206 129 81 511 2 25 1 41 366 230 145 91 183 115 72 45 25 1 27 330 207 130 82 165 104 65 41 Table E 2 NAC Wiring Requirements for FACP Notes 1 Calculations are based on Direct Current Resistance data for uncoated copper wire per National Electrical Code 2005 Edition Table 8 Conductor Properties MS 9600LS Series Manual P N 52646 B2 2 12 2010 197 Appendix F HVAC Control The FACP can be programmed to shut down a buildings HVAC fans in the event of a fire The fans cannot be restarted until the fire alarm condition has been cleared and the FACP has been reset to a normal non alarm condition IMPORTANT This HVAC feature is not to be used for smoke control It is only designed to shut down fans during a fire alarm condition F 1 Control Module Operation F 1 1 HVAC SHUTDN The HVAC SHUTDN type code can be assigned to any addressable control relay module for the purpose of shutting down HVAC fans during a fire alarm condition Devices connect
168. h a way that all devices will turn on and off at exactly the same time This is particularly critical when activating strobes which must be synchronized to avoid random activation and a potential hazard or confusion The FACP can be programmed to operate with a variety of manufacturer s devices Important When a Notification Appliance Circuit with a mix of audible and visual devices is programmed for silenceable and the synchronization feature is selected only the audible devices will be turned off if the Silence key is pressed The visual devices strobes etc will continue to operate 4 17 Coded Operation The NAC circuits resident on the control panel main circuit board can be programmed for coded operation The available pulse rates which can be programmed for coded operation are as follows Continuous Steady output with no pulsing e March Time Pulses at 120 ppm pulses per minute Temporal Code Pulses at second On Y second Off Y second On Y second Off Y second On 11 second Off e California Code 10 seconds On 5 seconds Off e Two Stage Pulses at 20 ppm pulses per minute for 5 minutes and then changes to Temporal MS 9600LS Series Manual P N 52646 B2 2 12 2010 157 Operating Instructions Presignal 4 18 Presignal Presignal option programs an initiating device to delay the activation of NACs and or control mod ules while allowing visual verification by a person Once a detector or monitor module trigger
169. has sis which must be mounted to the backbox and connected to the main circuit board Cabinet The FACP cabinet is red with a navy blue front overlay The backbox provides space for two batteries up to 18 Amp Hour Ample knockouts are provided for system wiring Also available is an optional dress panel DP 9692 which mounts to the inside of the cabinet required by ULC for Canadian applications ms 9600LS wmf Batteries Batteries must be sealed lead acid type The FACP cabinet provides space for two batteries up to 18 Amp Hour Batteries larger than 18 Amp Hour up to 26 Amp Hour require use of the BB 26 or similar UL listed battery cabinet The CHG 75 can be used for charging 26 to 75 AH batteries and MS 9600LS Series Manual P N 52646 B2 2 12 2010 19 Product Description Components the BB 26 can be used for housing the batteries The CHG 120F can be used for charging 26 to 120 AH batteries and the BB 55F can be used for housing the batteries Batteries must be ordered sep arately 1 6 1 Intelligent Addressable Detectors Newer Series Intelligent addressable detectors provide information to the control panel on an SLC Signaling Line Circuit refer to the SLC Wiring Manual for detailed information on device installation wir ing and operation This allows the control panel to continually process the information to deter mine the status alarm trouble maintenance or normal of each detector Each detect
170. he key will cause the display to toggle between Enabled Yes and Enabled No Modules Installed If an ANN BUS module is installed press 2 while viewing ANN BUS screen 1 to select ANN BUS addresses for the module s The following screen will be displayed ANH BUS MODULES 1 ADDR 1 HONE 2 ADDR 2 HONE S ADDR 3 HOHE ANN BUS Modules Screen 1 Pressing the down arrow key will allow the programmer to view additional screens displaying Addresses 1 8 To program an ANN BUS module to a specific address press the number key cor responding to the desired address in each screen The following screen will be displayed for each address ANN BUS MODULES ANH BUS ADDRESS 1 T YPE HOHE ANN BUS Address Screen MS 9600LS Series Manual P N 52646 B2 2 12 2010 121 Programming Master Programming Level Pressing 1 for Type will display the following screens ANN BUS MODULE TYPE 1 HOT INSTALLED 2 ANH 88 MODULE 3 AHH I 0 MODULE Module Type Screen 1 ANN BUS MODULE TYPE 1 AMN S PG MODULE 2 AHN LED MODULE S ANH RLY MODULE Module Type Screen 2 ANN BUS MODULE TYPE 1 ANH AUDIO Module Type Screen 3 Press the number corresponding to the module type that is installed with the selected address NOTE Ifthe module type selected is the ANN 80 ANN S PG or ANN AUDIO or if Not Installed is selected the ANN BUS Address Screen shown on the previous page will be displayed following the module selec
171. he characters A and B Press the right arrow key to move the cursor one position to the right and repeat the process to enter the next character To enter a space press the OZ key four times to place a blank in the desired position When all charac ters have been entered press Enter to store the information and return to the Banner Screen 102 MS 9600LS Series Manual P N 52646 B2 2 12 2010 Master Programming Level Programming SYSTEM SETUP epale calle The control panel time and date can be changed by pressing 3 while viewing the System Setup 3 TIME DATE Screen 1 The following screen will be displayed System Setup Screen 1 TIME AND DATE 1 1 TIME 16 66 AM 2 DATE 42 64 2610 S CLOCK FORMAT 12HR Time Date Screen 1 TIME AND DATE 1 DAYLIGHT SAVINGS Time Date Screen 2 Time To change the time press while viewing the Time Date Screen The following screen will be dis played ENTER TIME Time Screen A flashing cursor is located toward the top left of the display Below the cursor is the current time To change the time enter the two digit hours followed by the two digit minutes The cursor will move one position to the right each time a digit is entered After the last minutes digit is entered the cursor will again move one position to the right At this point enter for AM or 2 for PM The display will then return to the Time Date Screen which will show the new time entry If an error is made while e
172. he same zone can be silenced by pressing the Alarm Silence key or by using the auto silence feature To program a waterflow circuit as nonsilenceable refer to System Setup on page 100 NOTE Zone Types are only relevant for Central Station reporting Changing a zone type will only change how it is reported to the Central Station MS 9600LS Series Manual P N 52646 B2 2 12 2010 Master Programming Level Programming Zones Available Pressing 2 while viewing Zone Setup Screen 3 will display the following screen 3 ZONE MESSAGE Zone Setup Screen 3 ZOHES AVAILABLE p Hl 02 63 4 65 66 dr bs 69 16 11 12 13 14 15 16 1r 18 19 The display will show all of the zones that are still available for programming Note that an up and or down arrow may appear in the upper right corner of the display indicating that additional screens of zone information exists Press the up or down arrow key to view additional screens 3 6 4 Loop Setup Loop Setup allows the programmer to configure the SLC Loop s for NFPA Style 4 6 or 7 wiring and to select the protocol for each loop Pressing while viewing Programming Screen 2 will igor cee cause the following screen to be displayed 2 5YS5TEM SETUP 3 WERIFY LOOPS LOOP SETUP Programming Screen 2 1 L 00P 1 2 LOOP 2 3 PROTOCOL CLIP Loop Selection Screen Loop Selection Press while viewing the Loop Selection Screen to configure Loop or 2 to configure Loop 2 The follow
173. iewing ANN BUS Screen 2 will display the options selected for the installed ANN 80 annunciators 168 MS 9600LS Series Manual P N 52646 B2 2 12 2010 Read Status Operating Instructions 4 22 11 Phone Line Pressing 2 while viewing Read Status Screen 4 will display the following screen PHONE LINE PRIMARY TOUCHTOHE SECONDARY TOUCHTOME S SUPERV PHONE LINE The second and third lines of this screen indicate that both the Primary and Secondary phone lines have been configured for touchtone dialing operation Pressing 3 while viewing the Phone Line screen will cause the following screen to be displayed SUPERVISE PHONE LINE PHONE LINE 2 HO This screen indicates whether or not Phone Line 2 is being supervised In this example PHONE LINE 2 NO indicates the phone line is not being supervised 4 22 12 Central Station READ STATUS 1 ANNUNCIATORS Pressing 3 while viewing Read Status Screen 4 will display the following screens 2 PHONE LINE 3 CENTRAL STATION CENTRAL STATION O Read Status Screen 4 REPORTING ENABLED REPORT FIRST AWAIL CALL LIMIT 16 Central Station Screen 1 CENTRAL STATION ial 1 PRIMARY 2 SECONDARY REPORT STYLE ONE Central Station Screen 2 Central Station Screen 1 indicates whether the Central Station Reporting is enabled or disabled if the Reports will be sent to the First Available or Backup Primary and Secondary Central Station phone numbers and Call Limit for DACT trouble
174. ific detector 2 DELETE 3 EDIT Detector Screen DELETE DETECTOR ENTER DETECTOR tr S Delete Detector Screen A flashing cursor will appear in the position of the first asterisk to the left The programmer keys in the three digit detector address such as 005 When the last digit is keyed in the following screen will be displayed DELETE DETECTOR DETECTOR Bas IS DELETED The programmer can continue deleting detectors by pressing the ESC or left arrow key which will return the display to the Delete Detector Screen 68 MS 9600LS Series Manual P N 52646 B2 2 12 2010 Master Programming Level Programming m Edit Detector The programmer can change a detectors existing or factory default programming by pressing 3 in the Detector Screen The following screen will be displayed EDIT DETECTOR ENTER POINT ADDRESS Edit Detector Screen A flashing cursor will appear in the position of the first asterisk to the left The programmer keys in the three digit detector address such as 017 When the last digit is keyed in if the selected address has not been added to programming a screen showing information about a device that is installed with a lower address closest to the selected address will be displayed If no detectors have been installed on the loop the following will be displayed HO DETECTOR INSTALLED Edit Detector Screen 1 If the selected address has been added to programming device s
175. ightning and electrostatic discharge Apply AC power to the panel only after the system is completely installed and visually checked Note that AC power must be applied to the panel before installing the battery interconnect cable refer to the following sec tion 2 2 2 Battery Power Before connecting the batteries to the FACP make certain that the interconnect cable between the batteries is not connected Do not connect the interconnect cable until the system is com pletely installed Observe polarity when connecting the batter ies Connect the battery cable to TB2 on the main circuit board Refer Power Supply Calculations on page 174 for calculation of the correct battery rating Interconnect X Cable A WARNING RISK OF PERSONAL INJURY BATTERY CONTAINS SULFURIC ACID WHICH CAN CAUSE SEVERE BURNS TO THE SKIN AND EYES AND CAN DESTROY FABRICS IF CONTACT IS MADE WITH SULFURIC ACID IMMEDIATELY FLUSH THE SKIN OR EYES WITH WATER FOR 15 MINUTES AND SEEK IMMEDIATE MEDICAL ATTENTION 46 MS 9600LS Series Manual P N 52646 B2 2 12 2010 Relays Installation 2 2 3 Special Application DC Power Output Connection All Special Application DC power outputs are power limited Power limited Resettable Power Power limited Nonresettable Power 1 Power limited Nonresettable Power 2 1 5 amperes max 24 VDC nominal 1 5 amperes max 24 VDC nominal 1 5 amperes ma
176. igit is entered the zone will be enabled and the cursor will return to the original position The next zone to be enabled can then be entered Press Esc Escape to return to the previous screen Pressing 2 while viewing Zone Setup screen 1 will display the following screen ONE TO DISABLE Disable Screen A flashing cursor appears to the right of the Z To disable a zone enter the two digit zone number 00 99 After the second digit is entered the zone will be disabled and the cursor will return to the original position The next zone to be disabled can then be entered Press Esc Escape to return to the previous screen Pressing 3 while viewing Zone Setup screen 1 will display the following screen SPEC PURPOSE ZONE 1 PAS 97 OFF 2 PRE SIGMAL 98 OFF 3 FUTURE 99 OFF Disable Screen Zones 97 98 and 99 can be programmed for normal zone operation or for special purpose applica tions In the above illustration the three zones are shown Off which means they can be pro grammed to function in the same manner as all other zones by assigning them to input and output devices in the Programming Zone Assignment Screen Pressing will cause the display to change to PAS 97 On Each press of the key will cause the display to toggle between PAS 97 On and PAS 97 Off When Zone 97 is programmed On a PAS Positive Alarm Sequence activation of any detector will cause Zone 97 to activate By assigning Zone 97 to a control module
177. iliary equipment The control panel will indicate a trouble condition if a trouble is sensed at the Auxiliary Trouble Inputs If the 4XTMF Module is installed and FACP jumper JP6 has been cut to supervise it Auxiliary Trouble Input 1 J17 will monitor the 4XTMF for trouble conditions 2 6 4 SLC 2LS Expander Module The optional SLC 2LS Expander Module provides a second SLC loop for the FACP control panel This allows connection of an additional 318 addressable devices bringing the total to 636 address able devices which can be connected to the FACP Refer to the SLC Wiring Manual for informa tion on connecting devices to the SLC IMPORTANT When SLC wiring is run in conduit each SLC loop must be installed in separate conduit The following steps must be followed when installing the SLC 2LS Expander Module 1 Remove all power AC and DC from the FACP before installing the SLC 2LS module 2 Remove four screws from main FACP motherboard from locations indicated in following illustration and replace with four supplied metal standoffs MS 9600LS Series Manual P N 52646 B2 2 12 2010 57 Installation Optional Modules and Devices 3 Carefully plug connector J3 on the SLC 2LS module into connector J3 on the MS 9600LS MS 9600UDLS main circuit board being careful not to bend any pins 4 Secure the SLC 2LS Expander Module to the four standoffs installed in step 2 with the four supplied screws or the screws removed in step 2 5 C
178. in circuit board NAC Pressing while viewing NAC Screen 3 displays the following screen ONE ASSIGNMENT 200 Ft Fee AA ee Zone Screen MS 9600LS Series Manual P N 52646 B2 2 12 2010 111 Programming Master Programming Level NAC 1 1 SYNC TYPE NAC Screen 4 SYSTEM SETUP 1 TIMERS 2 NAC 3 RELAYS System Setup Screen 2 112 Note that Z represents the Zone Number s corresponding to the selected NAC The factory default for an unprogrammed device is Z00 for general alarm zone A flashing cursor will appear on the first 0 to the left Enter the two digit number corresponding to the zone that is to be assigned to this NAC The cursor moves to the next Z designation Continue entering zone assignments or the remaining zones can be left blank or programmed as general alarm zone Z00 When all desired changes have been made press the Enter key to store the zone assignments The display will return to the NAC Screen 3 which will show the zone assignments just entered m Silence Inhibited The Silence Inhibit feature when enabled prevents the silencing of the selected main circuit board NAC for a period of one minute Pressing 2 while viewing NAC Screen 3 will cause the display to change from the factory default of Silence Inhibit No to Silence Inhibit Yes Each press of the 2 key will cause the display to toggle between the two options m Synced Type If synchronized strobes were selected as the Type of
179. ing System Setup Screen 3 will configure the FACP to comply with Cana dian requirements The display will change to Canadian Opt On Each press of the key will System Setup Screen 3 cause the display to toggle between Canadian Opt On and Canadian Opt Off SYSTEM SETUP 1 CAMADIAN OPT OFF 2 WATERFLOW SIL HO Important For Canadian Applications this option must be set to ON prior to any other panel pro gramming MS 9600LS Series Manual P N 52646 B2 2 12 2010 113 Programming Master Programming Level The Canadian Options configures the FACP with the following as required by Canada The following monitor module type codes are not available monitor e non latching supervisory e non latching drill e non latching process monitor process monitor e hazard e tornado e medical alert The auto silence timer is fixed at 20 minutes and cannot be changed e Addressable ionization smoke detector sensitivity is automatically monitored using Canadian specifications Waterflow Silenceable Pressing 2 while viewing System Setup Screen 3 will allow the programmer to configure the sys tem for silenceable on nonsilenceable waterflow circuits Each press of the 2 key will toggle the display between Waterflow Sil No and Waterflow Sil Yes When Waterflow Sil No is selected all output devices associated with a waterflow type input device will be nonsilenceable When Water flow Sil Yes is selected all output devices ass
180. ing screens will appear for each loop LOOP SETUP 1 STYLE 4 Loop Setup Screen m Style To program the SLC Style for the selected loop press for Style while viewing Loop Setup Screen In the preceding example the control panel is programmed for Style 4 SLC wiring as indi cated by the 4 to the right of Style in the display To change the wiring style press to toggle the display to read Style 6 Each press of the key will cause the display to toggle between Style 4 and Style 6 Note that when programming the Loop Style the programmer can only select between Style 4 and Style 6 To program a system for Style 7 wiring the programmer must select the Loop Setup for Style 6 Style 7 wiring is the same as Style 6 with the added requirement that each addressable device on the loop must have a pair of isolator modules one on each side Note on SLC Troubles Ifthe FACP reports an open fault on an SLC Loop programmed for Style 6 the trouble condition will latch at the FACP When the SLC Loop has been repaired the Reset button must be pressed at the FACP at least 2 minutes after the trouble has been repaired to clear the SLC trouble MS 9600LS Series Manual P N 52646 B2 2 12 2010 99 Programming Master Programming Level Loop Protocol Loop Protocol refers to the SLC loop mode of operation Refer to Wire Requirements on page 196 for wire specifications based upon SLC protocol Two modes of operation are available
181. int 16 Point 17 Point 18 Point 19 Point 20 Active Alarm Active Alarm Active Alarm Active Alarm Active Alarm Point 21 Point 22 Point 23 Point 24 Point 25 Active Alarm Active Alarm Active Alarm Active Alarm Active Alarm Point 26 Point 27 Point 28 Point 29 Point 30 Active Alarm Active Alarm Active Alarm Active Alarm Active Alarm ANN RLED Module 1 Point Range 01 30 Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Point 31 Point 32 Point 33 Point 34 Point 35 Active Alarm Active Alarm Active Alarm Active Alarm Active Alarm Point 36 Point 37 Point 38 Point 39 Point 40 Active Alarm Active Alarm Active Alarm Active Alarm Active Alarm Point 41 Point 42 Point 43 Point 44 Point 45 Active Alarm Active Alarm Active Alarm Active Alarm Active Alarm Point 46 Point 47 Point 48 Point 49 Point 50 Active Alarm Active Alarm Active Alarm Active Alarm Active Alarm Point 51 Point 52 Point 53 Point 64 Point 55 Active Alarm Active Alarm Active Alarm Active Alarm Active Alarm Point 56 Point 57 Point 58 Point 59 Point 60 Active Alarm Active Alarm Active Alarm Active Alarm Active Alarm ANN RLED Module 2 Point Range 31 60 The LED assignments for the modules annunciating Point Ranges 61 90 91 120 121 150 and 151 159 will follow the same pattern as the second ANN RLED module MS 9600LS Series Manual P N 52646 B2 2 12 2010 129 Programming Master Programming Level 130 ANN LED Point Option
182. ion Accessories 38 m ANN RLY Board Layout and Connection to FACP Figure 1 15 illustrates the ANN RLY board showing locations of screw terminals for connection to the FACP and the DIP switches for selecting the ANN BUS ID number ANN BUS ID Address DIP switch ooo oo SO K O aj B6 TI Ground Wire attaches to chassis see documentation supplied with module ANN BUS 24 VDC 9600Istorly wmf Figure 1 15 ANN RLY Board Layout and Connection to FACP ANN BUS Audio Panel Control WARNING RISK OF ELECTRICAL SHOCK AND EQUIPMENT DAMAGE DISCONNECT ALL SOURCES OF POWER AC AND DC BEFORE INSTALLING OR REMOVING ANY MODULES OR WIRING The FACP is capable of providing automated activation of the ACC 25 50 ZS T zoned system speaker circuits To do this the FACP must be enabled to communicate with the ACC 25 50ZS Audio Panel over the ANN BUS refer to ANN BUS Enabled on page 121 This is accom plished by programming the Audio Panel ANN BUS address into the FACP refer to Modules Installed on page 121 For details on setting the ANN BUS address and programming the audio panel refer to the ACC 25 50ZS Series Audio Panel manual document 51889 The ACC 25 50ZS Series audio panel connects to the FACP via the ACS ANN BUS communica tion circuit Zones 33 56 on the FACP correspond to the ACC 25 50ZS Series audio circuits 1 24
183. ion Document Document 53032 ANN I O Installation Document Document 151416 ANN RLY Installation Document Document 53033 ANN S PG Installation Document Document 151417 ACC 25 50 ZS T Manual Document 51889 This product has been certified to comply with the requirements in the ANSI UL 864 Standard for Control Units and Accessories for Fire Alarm Systems 9th Edition Operation of this product with products not tested for ANSI UL 864 9th Edition has not been evaluated Such operation requires the approval of the local Authority Having Jurisdiction AHJ MS 9600LS Series Manual P N 52646 B2 2 12 2010 9 payuu 1emoduou pasinladns wnwxew noH dwy 9Z OA bz fioneg JuumnoAe sejpno096 AYaL1Vg er O O sepelbdn asemyos Mope E 3 1 OVIADA jo Bulpeo smojje uonisod NMOG amp E ASIN val YOUMs 104 uonisod jeunou SI d LMS or yomg elqeuz peo Lowen ysel 8 arin E 00000000 E feg o JA quwnu noo a di 4 ea ala 140 918 ova 140 eae Lear jeaoidde uonopsunp nouo sur Bureus ES ar 113 0N9 Y3OWVHO BuneH Ayouny PHY puz euondo 104 Joj9auuo AL aavsia WOOT yum juO Zaf Jeduin evocwey anova pIeoquo B OL 3038 S INOJIO JO UONE9YNUSPI a id zar sse o aiis VAAN IN dumi SPIOA Zdf Jedtun jqes q yne4 Gdf WO JUNYSOCUN SAOWSI unolg Buinoway jueyodu P HH pA E P a P LLP 8 oLr ess uooa ep yne punolb ajqesip o P 9 bu y
184. is selected as the module option and the module is programmed to annunciate alarms only the first ten LEDs on the first ANN LED module will display the system status information The remaining 30 LEDs on the first module and the last 30 LEDs on the remaining modules will display the active alarm status of each zone in the Zone Range programmed for that particular module The LED assignments for each ANN LED module will be as follows Alarm Silenced NAC 1 Fault NAC 2 Fault NAC 3 Fault NAC 4 Fault Earth Fault Battery Fault Charger Fault Disabled Maintenance Zone 00 Zone 01 Zone 02 Zone 03 Zone 04 Active Alarm Active Alarm Active Alarm Active Alarm Active Alarm Zone 05 Zone 06 Zone 07 Zone 08 Zone 09 Active Alarm Active Alarm Active Alarm Active Alarm Active Alarm Zone 10 Zone 11 Zone 12 Zone 13 Zone 14 Active Alarm Active Alarm Active Alarm Active Alarm Active Alarm Zone 15 Zone 16 Zone 17 Zone 18 Zone 19 Active Alarm Active Alarm Active Alarm Active Alarm Active Alarm Zone 20 Zone 21 Zone 22 Zone 23 Zone 24 Active Alarm Active Alarm Active Alarm Active Alarm Active Alarm Zone 25 Zone 26 Zone 27 Zone 28 Zone 29 Active Alarm Active Alarm Active Alarm Active Alarm Active Alarm ANN RLED Module 1 Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Zone 30 Zone 31 Zone 32 Zone 33 Zone 34 Active Alarm Active Alarm Active Alarm Active Alarm Active
185. ither Point addressable device address information or Zone information Pressing while viewing ANN I O Address Screen 3 will select the Point or Zone range to be annunciated refer to the tables in ANN I O Zone Option on page 123 and ANN I O Point Option on page 125 Pressing 2 while viewing ANN I O Address Screen 3 will select either addressable detectors or addressable modules to be annunciated Pressing 3 while viewing ANN I O Address Screen 3 will select the SLC loop with the address able devices to be annunciated ANN I O Zone Option If Zone is selected as the module option the first ten LEDs on the first ANN I O module will dis play the system status information The remaining 30 LEDs on the first module and 40 LEDs on the remaining modules will display the active alarm status of each zone in the Zone Range pro grammed for that particular module The LED assignments for each ANN I O module will be as follows ANN I O Module 1 ANN I O Module 2 ANN I O Module 3 Module LED y Function Function Function 1 AC Fault Zone 30 Zone 70 2 Fire Alarm Zone 31 Zone 71 3 Supervisory Zone 32 Zone 72 MS 9600LS Series Manual P N 52646 B2 2 12 2010 123 Programming Master Programming Level 4 Trouble Zone 33 Zone 73 5 Alarm Silenced Zone 34 Zone 74 6 Earth Fault Zone
186. itor module which will be used to override the HVAC SHUTDN control module and prevent the fans from turning off refer to Type Monitor under the section titled Edit Module Screen for Monitor Module on page 79 The HVAC OVRRIDE monitor module does not latch when activated Activating a switch connected to the monitor module will override all HVAC SHUTDN control relay modules in the system preventing the HVAC SHUTDN modules from activating and causing the FACP LCD to display an active HVAC OVRRIDE module and turn on the Supervisory LED Releasing the switch will allow the HVAC SHUTDN control relay modules to activate with subsequent alarms turning off the fans As an example pressing the HVAC OVRRIDE switch with no alarms in the system will prevent the fans from being turned off when an alarm does occur As long as the switch is activated the fans will not shutdown for any alarms If the system is still in alarm when the switch is released the fans will not shutdown unless another alarm occurs after the switch is released Important If an alarm exists in the system and HVAC Shutdown has already occurred HVAC OVRRIDE will have no effect on the HVAC SHUTDN control relay modules HVAC OVRRIDE will prevent HVAC Shutdown from occurring only if it is initiated prior to an alarm condition NOTE Activation of the HVAC OVRRIDE module causes a supervisory event that will be communicated to the Central Station if enabled MS 9600LS Series Manual
187. l cause the following screen s to be dis 2 STANDARD NOUN CUSTOM ADJECTIVE played Note that the keyboard down arrow key must be pressed to see all the Noun screens Press 4 CUSTOM HOUN the number corresponding to the noun that is to be used as a descriptor for the location of the con trol module currently being programmed Noun Adjective Screen e e 1 CLOSET EEE FAA EEE EEE tt 1 BASEMENT 2 BOILER RM S CLASSROOM Noun Screen 1 Noun Screen 2 2 CORRIDOR S ELECTRIC RM See et 1 ELEWATOR 2 ENTRANCE 35 FLOOR le a le EEE EEE 1 GARAGE 2 HALLWAY S HVAC RM Noun Screen 3 Noun Screen 4 tttttttttttttttttttt a 1 KITCHEH 1 PATIENT 2 LOBBY 2 RESTROOM 3 0F FICE 3 R00M Noun Screen 5 Noun Screen 6 SEE et SEE EEE 1 STARIRWAY 1 2Z0HE 2 STOREROOM S WING Noun Screen 7 Noun Screen 8 Pressing 3 or 4 while viewing the Noun Adjective Screen will display screens similar to the previ ous Adjective and Noun Screens The new screens will list Custom Adjectives and Nouns which have been programmed into the control panel using the PS Tools programming kit MS 9600LS Series Manual P N 52646 B2 2 12 2010 93 Programming Master Programming Level EDIT CONTROL 1 ADJECTIVE NOUN 2 DESCRIPTION Edit Control Screen 4 94 Description The Description selection allows the programmer to enter additional information about the control module currently being programmed This inform
188. l devices programmed for Waterflow delay press 3 while viewing Timer Screen 1 The following screen will be displayed WATERFLOW DELAY RANGE 6 96 SECONDS Waterflow Delay Screen A flashing cursor is positioned in the lower left corner of the display Enter a delay time consisting of two digits such as 25 for twenty five seconds Upon entering the second digit the time delay will be stored in the control panel memory and the display will return to the Delay Screen which will indicate the new delay time m AC Loss Delay The reporting of a loss of AC power to a central station can be delayed by programming the length of the desired delay The factory default setting is 2 hours Press 7 while viewing Timer Screen 2 to display the following AC LOSS DELAY 1 HO DELAY Z2 ENTER DELAY AC Loss Delay Screen 1 Pressing while viewing AC Loss Delay Screen 1 will program the FACP to transmit an AC Loss report immediately to the central station MS 9600LS Series Manual P N 52646 B2 2 12 2010 Master Programming Level Programming Pressing 2 while viewing AC Loss Delay Screen 1 will display the following screen AC LOSS DELAY RANGE B0 23 W S AC Loss Delay Screen 2 A flashing cursor will appear in the lower left corner of the display The factory default setting is 02 hours Type the two digit AC loss reporting delay in hours 00 to 23 hour delay When the sec ond digit is entered the display will
189. lay the following READ STATUS l 1 TIME DATE SOLENES Read Status Screen 6 DAYLIGHT SAVINGS ENABLED YES START MONTH MAR START WEEK WEEK 2 DAYLIGHT SAVINGS jf END MONTH HOW END WEEK WEEK 1 MS 9600LS Series Manual P N 52646 B2 2 12 2010 173 Section 5 Power Supply Calculations 5 1 Overview This section contains instructions and tables for calculating power supply currents in alarm and standby conditions This is a four step process consisting of the following 1 Calculating the total amount of AC branch circuit current required to operate the system 2 Calculating the power supply load current for non fire and fire alarm conditions and calculating the secondary battery load 3 Calculating the size of batteries required to support the system if an AC power loss occurs 4 Selecting the proper batteries for your system 5 2 Calculating the AC Branch Circuit The control panel requires connection to a separate dedicated AC branch circuit which must be labeled FIRE ALARM This branch circuit must connect to the line side of the main power feed of the protected premises No other non fire alarm equipment may be powered from the fire alarm branch circuit The branch circuit wire must run continuously without any disconnect devices from the power source to the control panel Overcurrent protection for this circuit must comply with Article 760 of the National Electrical Codes as well as local codes Use 14
190. le viewing Zone Setup Screen 2 will display a screen similar to the following ONES ENABLED 66 bl 62 64 65 566 Br BS 69 16 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 15 19 26 21 Zones Enabled Screen This display will show all of the zones that are enabled in the control panel Note that an up and or down arrow may appear in the upper right corner of the display indicating that additional screens of zone information exists Press the up or down arrow keys to view the additional zones Zones Disabled Pressing 3 for Zones Disabled while viewing Zone Setup Screen 2 will display a screen similar to the following nen DISABLED Zones Disabled Screen This display will show all of the zones that are disabled in the control panel Note that an up and or down arrow may appear in the upper right corner of the display indicating that additional screens of zone information exists Press the up or down arrow keys to view the additional zones MS 9600LS Series Manual P N 52646 B2 2 12 2010 97 Programming Master Programming Level ZONE SETUP 1 ZONE TYPES 2 Z0NES AVAILABLE S ZONE MESSAGE Zone Setup Screen 3 Zone Type Zone Types must be programmed only if a DACT programmed for zone reporting is installed on the control panel Pressing for Zone Types while viewing Zone Setup Screen 3 will display a screen similar to the following ONE TYPE PROG 1 1 266 MONITOR 2 261 MONITOR 3 282 MONITOR Zones Installed S
191. lected relay Note that Relay 2 is fixed as a Trouble relay Selecting Relay 2 will have no effect on its programming The following screen will appear for each relay to be programmed RELAY 1 TYPE ALARM Relay Type Screen Pressing for Type while viewing the Relay Screen will cause the following screens to be dis played RELAY RELAY 1 RALARM 1 TROUBLE 2 SUPERVISORY 2 COMM FAIL S SUPERVISORY AR 3 PROCESS MON Relay Screen 1 Relay Screen 2 RELAY RELAY 1 PROCESS MOH AR 1 MEDICAL 2 AC LOSS 2 SILENCEABLE ALARM 3 HAZARD Relay Screen 3 Relay Screen 4 While viewing the selected screen press the number corresponding to the desired relay type to pro gram the main circuit board relay The choice will be stored in memory and the display will return to the Relay Type Screen which will show the programmed type choice Press the Escape key to return to the Relays Selection Screen and repeat the preceding procedure for the remaining relays Note the following 1 AR AutoResettable in SUPERVISORY AR and PROCESS MON AR means that a relay with the Supervisory and or Process Monitor type code when activated will automatically reset when the corresponding condition is cleared 2 A relay programmed with the Silenceable Alarm type will activate upon any alarm and deactivate when the FACP Alarm Silenced LED is illuminated Canadian Option SYSTEM SETUP 1 CANADIAN OPT OFF 2 WATERFLOW SIL HO Pressing while view
192. les which plug into the main circuit board are available for spe cial functions Available accessories include LED graphic and LCD annunciators reverse polar ity city box transmitter digital alarm communicator transmitter SLC expansion module local and remote upload download software and remote power expansion The MS 9600UDLS includes a factory installed DACT UD2 Digital Alarm Communicator Trans mitter Refer to DACT UD2 Installation on page 52 and to the DACT UD2 Manual Document 53037 which is supplied with the FACP for DACT wiring and programming information The DACT transmits system status alarm troubles AC loss etc to a Central Station via the public switched telephone network It also allows remote programming or interrogation of the control panel using the PS Tools Upload Download utility via the public switched telephone network Local programming and interrogation is also possible for the MS 9600UDLS using the PS Tools and the USB port J4 on the DACT UD2 The MS 9600LS can be programmed and interrogated locally using the serial port at TB7 Any personal computer with Windows XP or greater and compatible modem with a speed of 2400 baud or faster and PS Tools software may serve as a Ser vice Terminal This allows download of the entire program or upload of the entire program history file walktest data current status and system voltages The MS 9600LSC is a ULC approved Canadian version of the FACP which offers the sam
193. leted will be displayed DELETE MODULE MODULE BES IS DELETED m Edit Module Screen for Monitor Module The programmer can change a modules existing or factory default programming by pressing 3 in the Modules Screen The following screen will be displayed EDIT MODULE ENTER MODULE ADDRESS y Edit Module Screen MS 9600LS Series Manual P N 52646 B2 2 12 2010 79 Programming Master Programming Level 80 A flashing cursor will appear in the position of the first asterisk to the left The programmer keys in the three digit module address such as 0 2 When the last digit is keyed in if the selected address has not been added to programming a screen showing information about a device that is installed with a lower address closest to the selected address will be displayed If no modules are installed on the loop the following screen will be displayed HO MODULE INSTALLED Edit Module Screen If the selected address has been added to programming but a module such as a monitor module with the selected address is not physically installed on the SLC or has a communication fault the following screen will be displayed TROUBL MONITOR ADJ lt HDUN HAH 1M1611 2 If the selected address has been added to programming and a module such as a monitor module with the selected address is physically installed on the SLC and is communicating with the control panel the following screen will be displayed H
194. m Verification If alarm verification is selected an addressable smoke detector s alarm is ignored for a Retard time of 13 seconds and the detector s alarm condition is automatically reset There will be no alarm indication at the FACP during the Retard period A Confirmation period of 60 seconds follows during which a subsequent alarm from the same detector will cause the panel to immediately acti vate the appropriate outputs and indicate the alarm condition at the FACP If a different detector alarms any time during the first detector s verification period the panel will immediately activate MS 9600LS Series Manual P N 52646 B2 2 12 2010 159 Operating Instructions Walktest Detector Alarm Verification Retard Confirmation Detector Goes Into Alarm Alarm Ignored lt lt Control Panel Processes Alarm if Same Detector is Still in Alarm J gt Different Detector Alarms H Control Panel Immediately Processes Alarese _ gt During First Detector s Verification Period all appropriate outputs and indicate the alarm condition at the FACP If no additional detector alarms occur within 73 seconds of the first alarm 13 second Retard plus 60 second Confirmation the timer resets and the panel is ready to verify any new detector alarms which may occur 0 sec 13 sec 73 sec RETARD lt _ _ CONFIRMATION 60 seconds gt NOTE Alarm Verificati
195. m ripple voltage 1OmVays Total DC current available from each output is up to 1 5 amps see Figure 1 1 Power limited circuit nonsupervised Nonresettable Special Application Power 2 24 VDC Nominal TB3 Terminals 5 amp 6 Maximum ripple voltage 1OMVayys Total DC current available from each output is up to 1 5 amps see Figure 1 1 Power limited circuit nonsupervised ElA 485 ACS ANN BUS TB6 ACS ANN annunciator connector Terminal 1 and Terminal 2 ElA 485 TERM TB7 Terminal Mode annunciator connector Terminal 5 In 6 In 7 Out 8 Out Supervised power limited ElA 232 Serial TB7 Local serial PC Printer Connector Terminal Transmit 2 Receive 3 DTR 4 Ground Non supervised power limited MS 9600LS Series Manual P N 52646 B2 2 12 2010 Controls and Indicators Product Description 1 3 1 Current Availability The following figure illustrates the maximum current that is possible for each panel circuit and the total current available from the FACP power supply Resettable Special Application Power le se ale a he for 4 wire smoke detector p Lae Resettable Special 4 5 amps max S Application Power per circuit e Power 1 a Resettable Special 1 5 amps max w Application Power per circuit P Power 2 eo A NAC 1 3 amps max a Style Y or Z per circuit ye ee a PA NAC 3 3 amps max Se Style Y only per circuit a NAC 2 3 amps max Ss o Style Y or Z per circuit y
196. mming or editing using the FACP keypad or a PC keyboard e Remote Programming and Editing Feature allows creation and editing of site specific custom programs using a Windows based computer and modem For programs requiring a large amount of data entry this method may be preferred A PK CD programming CD ROM can be ordered for this purpose e Local Programming and Editing Feature allows creation and editing of site specific custom programs using a Windows based computer and the DACT UD2 USB connection on the MS 9600UDLS or Serial Port connection on TB7 of the MS 9600LS For programs requiring a large amount of data entry this method may be preferred A PK CD programming CD ROM can be ordered for this purpose The System All Normal screen will be displayed in a programmed system with no active alarms troubles or supervisories as illustrated below SYSTEM ALL NORMAL 10 00A 818867 Read Status mode can be entered while the panel is in any mode of operation If an alarm or super visory event exists at the panel the event must be cleared before entering Programming mode To access any of the programming or read status features the Enter or Mode key must be pressed which will cause the LCD to display the following 1 READ STATUS 2 PROGRAMMING S REMOTE DOWNLOAD Pressing while this screen is being displayed will cause the control panel to enter the Read Sta tus feature which allows the user to view the programmed features and st
197. modules and detectors can only have unique addresses of 1 to 99 Newer LiteSpeed devices modules and detectors can have unique addresses of 1 to 159 which means each zone can have up to 159 input and output devices assigned to it MS 9600LS Series Manual P N 52646 B2 2 12 2010 Correlations Software Zones Correlation of Input and Output Zones Input Devices Zones Output Devices o O os o o 300 CP300 04 SD350 06 DOD Wee E VW The zone correlations which are shown graphically above are also presented in Table A 1 on page 180 and Table A 2 on page 181 MS 9600LS Series Manual P N 52646 B2 2 12 2010 179 Software Zones Correlations DETECTOR ZONE ASSIGNMENT Address Goss a ADJ NOUN Address peta PEC ADJ NOUN 01 SD350 1 FIRST HALL 51 02 SD350 1 ELEV LOBBY 52 03 CP350 2 2ND FLOOR 53 04 CP350 2 ROOM 210 54 05 SD350 3 3RD FLOOR 55 06 SD350 3 MEZZANINE 56 07 SD350 3 MECH ROOM 57 08 58 09 59 10 60 11 61 12 62 13 63 14 64 15 65 16 66 17 67 18 68 19 69 20 70 21 71 22 72 23 73 24 74 25 75 26 76 27 77 28 78 29 79 30 80 31 81 32 82 33 83 34 84 35 85 36 86 37 87 38 88 39 89 40 90 41 91 42 92 43 93 44 94 45 95 46 96 47 97 48 98 49 99 50 100 180 Table A 1 Detector Programming She
198. n if selected prevents the Alarm Silence and Reset keys from functioning for 60 seconds following an alarm A second alarm during this 60 second period will not cause the timer to restart with a new 60 seconds Silence Inhibit operation requires the approval of the local Authority Hav ing Jurisdiction 4 20 2 Autosilence Timer If Autosilence is selected the notification appliances programmed as silenceable will automati cally be silenced after a programmable duration of from 5 to 30 minutes Pressing the Drill key will restart the timer Autosilence operation requires the approval of the local Authority Having Jurisdiction 4 20 3 Trouble Reminder If selected this feature causes a reminding beep every 15 seconds during an alarm after the Alarm Silence key is pressed and every two minutes during a trouble condition after the Acknowl edge Step or Alarm Silence key is pressed The beeps from the onboard piezo sounder will occur until the alarm or fault is cleared Note that if the trouble is not cleared within 24 hours the piezo will resound indicating that the trouble condition still exists 4 20 4 Waterflow Retard Timer If selected this option will delay the activation of a waterflow type alarm for a programmable time duration from 1 to 90 seconds This delay is in addition to any time delay inherent in the waterflow device This feature requires the approval of the local Authority Having Jurisdiction 4 20 5 Alar
199. n the pro grammer presses the keypad numerical key corresponding to the desired choice Note that subscreens may also have multiple options which require viewing more than one screen The same process as detailed in the previous paragraphs is followed to view all option choices 3 5 Programming and Passwords There are two factory set programming passwords which will access the Programming screens as indicated in the following examples From either of the screens access to specific system and device features or programming may be obtained All user programming entries are stored in non volatile memory The factory set passwords can be changed by the user as described in Password MS 9600LS Series Manual P N 52646 B2 2 12 2010 63 Programming Programming and Passwords Change on page 135 If an invalid password is entered the blinking cursor will return to the first password character position To exit Programming or Read Status mode at any time press the ESC Escape key repeatedly Note that Programming mode must be exited using the ESC key in order to store the program data entered during this mode Ifthe Reset key is pressed or power is lost before exiting Programming mode the data just entered will not be saved To access user Programming mode press the Enter or Mode key The LCD will display the follow ing 1 READ STATUS 2 PROGRAMMING S REMOTE DOWMLOAD To enter the user Programming mode press 2 The display
200. n address of 001 on loop 1 but have not been programmed to any input devices Use the up and down arrow keys to view all the zones without input assignments MS 9600LS Series Manual P N 52646 B2 2 12 2010 137 Programming Maintenance Programming Level Pressing 3 while viewing Program Check screen will cause a screen similar to the following to be displayed ONES HO OUTPUT 65 Br 69 16 11 10661 The Zone No Output feature allows the programmer to view the zones which have not been pro grammed to at least one output device not including general alarm Zone 00 The example in the preceding screen indicates that Zones 05 07 09 10 and 11 have been programmed to an address able detector with an address of 001 on loop 1 but have not been programmed to any output devices Use the up and down arrow keys to view all the zones without output assignments 3 7 Maintenance Programming Level To access Maintenance Programming mode press the Enter key The LCD will display the follow ing 1 READ STATUS 2 PROGRAMMING S REMOTE DOWNLOAD To enter the Maintenance Programming mode press 2 The display will read as follows PROGRAMMING ENTER PASSWORD When the Maintenance level password default 11111 is entered the following screen will appear PROGRAMMING 1 POINT PROGRAM 2 HISTORY S PROGRAM CHECK 138 MS 9600LS Series Manual P N 52646 B2 2 12 2010 Maintenance Programming Level Programming Note that i
201. n stored a screen similar to the second will be displayed indicating the latest event As walktest events occur the display will change to indicate the latest event All stored events can be scrolled on the screen by pressing the up or down arrow keys To return to the first event press the st Event key MS 9600LS Series Manual P N 52646 B2 2 12 2010 Master Programming Level Programming Pressing 2 for View Points while viewing the Unit In Walktest screen will display one of the follow ing screens UNTESTED POINTS 4616 HO POINTS IH 10661 SMOKE PHOTOS SYSTEM FEES EEE EE EEE EEE EES HOT TESTED If the system has no points installed the first screen will be displayed If points are installed the second screen will be displayed which allows the viewing of all untested system points and their status relating to the current walktest session The up and down arrow keys will allow viewing of all untested points Ifa point is tested while it is being displayed the screen will update and display the next untested point The first line indicates the total number of untested points The second line displays information about an untested point A description on the bottom of the screen will indi cate if the displayed point has been disabled if the Walktest option has been disabled for that point or if the point is not yet tested The up and down arrow keys allow the user to scroll through all untested points Pressing 3 for View Summa
202. n the ANN S PG module Note that the 9 pin DB 9 port on the ANN S PG is used to connect a serial printer The 25 pin port is used for a Centronics parallel printer cable Connect either a serial or parallel printer but not both at the same time Setting Printer Options Refer to the documentation supplied with the PRN 6F printer for instructions on using the printer menu controls Set the printer options under the menu area as shown in the following table Option Setting Option Setting Font HS Draft CPI 10CPI LPI 6 LPI Skip 0 5 ESC Character ESC Emulate Epson FX 850 Bidirectional Copy ON 1 0 CG TAB Graphic Buffer 40K Country E US ASCII Serial Auto CR OFF Baud 9600 or 2400 Color Option Not Installed Format 7 Bit Even 1 Stop Formien Protocol XON XOFF Lines 6LPI 60 Character Set Standard Table 1 2 PRN 6F Setup Options MS 9600LS Series Manual P N 52646 B2 2 12 2010 31 Product Description Accessories 32 Standard Exec 10 5 Sl Zero On Auto LF On PAPER BIN 1 12 72 BIN 2 12 72 SINGLE 12 72 PUSH TRA 12 72 PULL TRA 12 72 PAP ROLL 12 72 Table 1 2 PRN 6F Setup Options ANN 1 O LED Driver Module The ANN I O is an LED driver module that can be used in a wide variety of applications including as an interface with most customized graphic annunciators The ANN I O can drive up to 40 LEDs The module is provided with a plastic enclosure for mounting inside the an
203. n the preceding screens an arrow appears to inform the programmer that additional options can be viewed by pressing the keypad down arrow key as shown in the following screen PROGRAMMING 1 WALK TEST 2 S STEM 3 ZDHE SETUP 3 7 1 Disable Point PROGRAMMING 1 POINT PROGRAM 2 HISTORY 3 PROGRAM CHECK Maintenance Screen 1 Pressing for Point Program while viewing Maintenance Screen 1 will cause the following screens to be displayed POINT PROGRAM 1 LOOF 1 2 L00P 2 Loop Select Screen Select the Loop containing the device to be disabled by pressing for Loop 1 or 2 for Loop 2 A screen will then be displayed allowing the operator to select the type of addressable device to be disabled as shown in the following display POINT PROGRAM 1 DETECTOR 2 MODULE Device Select Screen Select the device type by pressing for an addressable detector or 2 for an addressable module The operator will be prompted to enter the three digit device address as shown in the following example for a detector EDIT DETECTOR ENTER POINT ADDRESS t Address Select Screen MS 9600LS Series Manual P N 52646 B2 2 12 2010 139 Programming Maintenance Programming Level A flashing cursor will appear in the bottom left corner of the display prompting for the three digit device address When the third digit is enter 001 for example a screen will appear which will allow enabling or disabling of the selected point as
204. ndby 35 mA Each LED 10 mA e Operating Temperature 32 F to 120 F 0 C to 49 C For indoor use in a dry location only m ANN I O Connection to FACP The ANN I O connects to the FACP via the ANN BUS as illustrated in Figure 1 9 After the ANN I O is connected to the panel it must be added to the system via FACP programming Refer to the section titled ANN I O Options on page 123 P1 P2 P3 P4 PEENTE eee pee podava j pee E CEE CEE FERRE a 1 10 11 20 21 30 31 40 L J L J L L J LED out LED out LED Out LED Out LED Power LED Power LED Power LED Power not used not used not used not used O ANN 1 0 Module ANN BUS nonresettable ACS BUS ANN BUS and power wiring are supervised and power limited a U al 9600Istoannio wmf FACP Figure 1 9 ANN I O Connection to FACP m ANN I O Module LED Wiring There are four 12 pin connectors on the ANN I O module for connecting LEDs Each set of 10 LEDs get their power from Pin 11 of the corresponding connector Internal resistors are sized so that there is approximately 10 mA of current for each LED No series resistors are required Refer to the programming section titled ANN I O Options on page 123 of this manual The LEDs are wired as illustrated in Figure 1 10 Note that the illustration depic
205. necsaesseseaceseeeaeeseecaecaaesaecsecereeeeeeeseneeneeenes 158 4 20 Special System AS enc vues cake E ae cds ch gute a E E EE E E 159 42051 Silence Inhibit MA e a sas 159 4 20 2 Autosilence Timer ii ii de ca 159 4 20 37 Trouble Render aaiia 159 4 2047 Waterflow Retard Dia c 159 4 20 5 Alarm Veritas s 159 Bey dida 160 A LAS in 160 4 221 System P itse x scec annenin e e E E E E E ee ge NE eT GS eR A 162 EDIL A de EE AEN OEA E A 163 ADD Be NA RRA 164 4 29 Ax Trouble Rd ii 165 ADDS A NN 165 ADN AC A A sa 166 E A EN NN 166 428 Program Check aii 167 422 9 A O A 167 IA SE ON SN 167 4 22 11s Phone B10 ea 169 422 127 Contral SETO a TEE EENE N E TEE EE E EET 169 4 22 13 Service SS OA 170 A D2 lA O 170 Ah DD A NN 171 4 2210 Time Dateie er a e e e ee 173 Section 5 Power Supply CalculatiONS ooommmmccccnnnnnnnncanccccccnnnnnnnnnnnnn cnn cnn nana nnr rr rra 174 O n onien i o jE Heese vege E ieee Wee WUE a doh eek es ea Ee E E 174 5 2 Calculating the AC Branch Circuit 2 4 shies teneeht A A ed ee i ee ea 174 5 3 Calculating the System Current Draw cccceceesccescessessceseeeecenseeeecseeesecaecesesaeceecesesaeeeseeeeeeaeeeeeceeeeaeeaeeaees 174 IE OV OLVICW ARETE E EEE heise atop vats ex o idad 174 5 3 2 How to Use Table 5 3 on page 176 to Calculate System Current Draw ceeceeseeeeeseeeseeeeenes 175 5 4 Calculating the Battery IZ cece Ac ts stn i cen ee eens 177 5 4 1 NFPA Battery Requirements s ee ii
206. ng NORMAL CONTROL ADJ lt HDUN SW Z HHA 1M641 2 Edit Control Screen 1 In the preceding example Normal indicates that the module with the selected address is physically installed on the SLC and communicating with the control panel enabled e lt ADJ gt lt NOUN gt represents the adjective and noun which have been programmed describing the location of the displayed device e Control indicates that the selected module is a control module e Sor represents Silenceable S or Nonsilenceable e Wor represents Waterflow Timer Delay W Waterflow Timer Delay enabled Waterflow Timer Delay disabled ZNNN represents the first of five possible software zones that the module is assigned to NNN the three digit zone number from 000 099 e 1M002 represents the Loop Device type and Device address 1 SLC Loop 1 M Module and 002 Module Address 02 88 MS 9600LS Series Manual P N 52646 B2 2 12 2010 Master Programming Level Programming To change the programming for the displayed module press the keyboard down arrow key to view the following Edit Control screens EDIT CONTROL 1 EMABLED YES Z TYPE CONTROL 3 SILENCEABLE YES Edit Control Screen 2 EDIT CONTROL 1 WALEK TEST YES 2 Z0NE ASSIGNMENT Ae Edit Control Screen 3 EDIT CONTROL 1 NOUMNADJECTIVE 2 DESCRIPTION EEE AE EEE EE FEAR Edit Control Screen 4 Enable Disable Module
207. nnnnnn nana 13 DP A A OR NR NN 13 A USE A A O A 13 1 32 Specifications ii e 15 13 E Current Available os adi 17 LA Controls and Indicators ii secede RE E EEEE E A E Ea Gin 17 LS C meS a aa ld Deep es Eb as 18 RES A NN NON 19 1 6 1 Intelligent Addressable Detectors Newer Series ccccscessecsseeseeeeceseesecescesecnseeeeeeeeeseeeaeeaeecaecsaeeaees 20 1 6 2 Intelligent Addressable Modules Newer Series ccccsccssecseceeceeceeceeceseeseeeeeeeeeeeeseeeneeseeaeeeenaees 20 1 6 3 300 Series Intelligent Addressable Devices 2 0 cccesseeseessessecesensecsecseeseceecnseceseeeeeeeeseeeaeeseesaeeaeenaees 20 1 6 4 Addressable Device Accessories cesccescesseescesseeseeseessecseessecaeceaecseceesusecussaeseeeseseesesesesseaeeaecseenaees 20 1 7 Optional Modules ami aa 21 1 8 ACCESSOTIES a A teenie ties en eee ica 21 1 8 1 PS T ols Programming Utility ie occ decceisreries iene a E R E 21 1 8 2 Dress Panel DP 9 09210 ii 22 128 33 TRECE TORIO iaa 22 PBA Battery BDO ia 22 128 5 Battery A e eee deceo des athe Lt e de 22 CHG 75 Battery Charger Aia devel 22 CHG 120 Battery Charro in 22 1 8 6 New ANN BUS Annunciators Devices ceccecceeseessessecsecssecseceseceecuscueeceseaeseeeseeeeeeaeeeaeeaeenaecseenaees 23 AN N BUS WENE sonia Dior Dase tues Sool S E ned ta 23 ANN BUS Device Addressing cda 26 ANN 80 Remote Fire Annunciator cccccccsesceeseceseeseceeceseceeceseceeeeseeseceseeeecaecesecaessaecsecaeceenren
208. nresettable y 2 Figure 1 3 FACP wiring to ANN BUS Device MS 9600LS Series Manual P N 52646 B2 2 12 2010 25 Product Description Accessories 26 Powering ANN BUS Devices from Auxiliary Power Supply Figure 1 4 illustrates the powering of ANN BUS devices from an auxiliary power supply such as the FCPS 24FS6 8 when the total ANN BUS power requirement exceeds the capability of the FACP s DC Power Output circuit NACT 72 Cut Ground Fault Detection jumper JP1 FACP monitors for ground faults NO NC COM 186 z 4 l ANN BUS and power wiring are 321 supervised and power limited gt JP1 passes JP2 JP3 15555 aa 181 KAXA 24 VDC 5 ANN 80 9600Istofcpstoann wmf ANN BUS q 24 VDC ANN BUS nonresettable ACS BUS a SYNC IN o S 3 N v Fo DN g SYNC IN TB4 FCPS 24FS6 8 FACP Ces Figure 1 4 Powering ANN BUS Devices from FCPS 24FS6 8 ANN BUS Device Addressing Each ANN BUS device requires a unique address ID Number in order to communicate with the FACP A 5 position DIP switch on each device is used to set this address The address set for these devices must also be programmed at the FACP for the specific device refer to the programming section titled ANN BUS Options on page 121 A maximum of 8 devices can be connected to the FACP ANN BUS communication circuit Device addresses do not nee
209. nter a two digit zone number 01 99 When the second digit is entered the zone will be disabled and the cursor will return to the original position next to the Z Another zone can then be disabled Zone 97 98 and 99 Pressing 3 for Zone 97 98 and 99 while viewing Zone Setup Screen 1 will display the following screen SPEC PURPOSE ONE 1 PAS 97 OFF 2 PRESIGHAL 98 OFF 3 TWO STAGE 99 OFF Zone 97 98 and 99 Screen Zones 97 98 and 99 can be programmed for normal zone operation or for special purpose applica tions In the above illustration the three zones are shown Off which means they can be pro grammed to function in the same manner as all other zones by assigning them to input and output devices in the Programming Zone Assignment Screen Pressing will cause the display to change to PAS 97 On Each press of the key will cause the display to toggle between PAS 97 On and PAS 97 Off When Zone 97 is programmed On a PAS Positive Alarm Sequence activation of any detector will cause Zone 97 to activate By assigning Zone 97 to a control module in the Programming Zone Assignment Screen an output device con nected to the control module can be used to indicate a PAS condition in the control panel Do not assign Zone 97 to a Notification Appliance Circuit when using this zone to indicate a PAS condi tion Pressing 2 will cause the display to change to Pre signal 98 On Each press of the 2 key will cause the display to to
210. ntering a digit press the CLR key to delete the entire entry and beginning again Date To change the date press 2 while viewing the Time Date Screen The following screen will be dis played ENTER DATE _ MONTH DAY YEAR 62 84 7818 Date Screen A flashing cursor is located toward the top left of the display Below the cursor is the current date To change the date enter the two digit month followed by the two digit day and then the two digit year 09 for 2009 10 for 2010 etc The cursor will move one position to the right each time a MS 9600LS Series Manual P N 52646 B2 2 12 2010 103 Programming Master Programming Level TIME AND DATE 1 DAYLIGHT SAVINGS Time amp Date Screen 2 104 digit is entered After the last year digit is entered the display will return to the Time Date Screen which will show the new date entry If an error is made while entering a digit press the CLR key to delete the entire entry and beginning again m Clock Format The clock can be configured to display 12 hour AM amp PM or 24 hour military time Pressing 3 while viewing the Time Date screen will cause the display to toggle between 12HR and 24HR Select 12HR for 12 hour display or 24HR for 24 hour display NOTE If the clock is changed to 24 hour military format the date will change to the European standard of Day Month Year for display purposes only m Daylight Savings Time Pressing while viewing Tim
211. nto JP8 ARIAS with Class A pointing down toward circuit board VEEP CELEXA as illustrated to the right CISA J Scored mark Style Y Class B install NACKEY into JP8 Key w A ___ Tciassa i a with Class B pointing down toward circuit board I NACKEY PC NACKEY must be inserted with text side facing Key slot la in toward center of main circuit board and key into key slot as illustrated to the right It is keyed JP8 to prevent incorrect insertion Top edge of FACP pp Main Circuit Board TB4 If the 4XTMF Option Module is to be installed in connectors J10 and J11 the NACKEY card must be carefully separated at the scored mark and only the NACKEY card slot p gt alado loa lolo lola JP8 required half installed into JP8 This will allow room for the 4XTMF module 4XTMF OPT BD 4XTMF Module connectors P gt J10 EO X J11 connectors for 4XTMF option module Figure 2 6 NAC Configuration Using NACKEY 48 MS 9600LS Series Manual P N 52646 B2 2 12 2010 Notification Appliance Circuits Installation 2 4 2 Style Y Class B NAC Wiring 4 Style Y Class B Notification Appliance Circuits supervised and power limited 4 7K ohm watt P N 71252 UL listed NAC1 NAC3 NAC4 NAC 2 TD TD TD TID AA gt Polarized Bells Polarized Bells Polarized Strobes wI wI wI WI Polarized Strobes Polarized Horns
212. nunciator or accessory box The following sections describe hardware installation Refer to the section titled ANN BUS Options on page 121 for programming information In Canada the color red must be used to indicate active alarm inputs Yellow indicates supervi sory burglary or trouble signals Green indicates the presence of power or an activated output m ANN I O Board Layout Figure 1 8 illustrates the ANN I O board showing locations of screw terminals for connection to the FACP pin connectors for connecting LEDs and the DIP switch for selecting the ANN BUS ID number Terminals not used future JE Ge Gs GHG a P1 P2 P3 P4 AER LB E e LEE POCREE e CRPPESO TE 1 10 11 20 21 30 31 40 L L L L LED Out LED Out LED out LED Out LED Power LED Power LED Power LED Power Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used ANN BUS ID i t Address DIP gm switch E i DIA Y p Q ade O A B O oO ANN BUS Connector Figure 1 8 ANN I O Board Layout MS 9600LS Series Manual P N 52646 B2 2 12 2010 Accessories Product Description m Specifications Max ANN BUS Voltage 28 VDC Max Current e Alarm 200 mA e Sta
213. ociated with a waterflow type input device will be silenceable 3 6 6 Verify Loops o Pressing 3 while viewing Programming Screen 2 will select the Verify Loops option and display OP SETUP 2 SWSTEM SETUP the following screen S VERIFY LOOPS VERIFY LOOPS 1 LOOF 1 Programming Screen 2 2 LOOP 2 BDTH LOOPS Verify Loop Select Screen During loop verification the FACP polls each device on the selected SLC to determine if the device is communicating and whether or not it responds with the proper type identification The program mer can choose to verify one or both loops by pressing the number corresponding to the choices shown above When the selection is made the following screen will be displayed while verification is in progress VERIFYING LOOPS PLEASE WAIT Verification Progress Screen When Loop verification has been completed the display will indicate that the system is OK or if problems have been detected any device type programming errors Use the up and down arrow keys to view all detected errors 114 MS 9600LS Series Manual P N 52646 B2 2 12 2010 Master Programming Level Programming 3 6 7 History Menno The History option allows an authorized user to view or erase events which have occurred in the Z WALKTEST control panel Pressing while viewing Programming Screen 3 will display the History options 3 DPTION MODULES 3 i as shown in the following display Programming Sc
214. ode compared to the system program will cause a device trouble System Alarm Verification The control panel may be programmed to perform alarm verification to help eliminate the nuisance of false alarms Alarm verification applies to smoke detectors only Smoke Detector Data Smoke detector data is monitored by the FACP eliminating the need to test the sensitivity of each detector at its location A printout of each detector s data can be retrieved from the FACP using an optional printer or Windows HyperTerminal Detector sensing ability can decrease with age and should be monitored as part of a system s routine maintenance 4 14 Time Functions Real Time Clock The FACP includes a crystal based clock that provides time of day date and day of week Time is displayed as 12 or 24 hour time with month day year and is stored in RAM Daylight savings time change over is programmable and automatic If both AC and battery are lost the time must be reset 4 15 NAC Operation There are up to four programmable NACs Notification Appliance Circuits resident on the FACP main circuit board The NACs may be programmed as silenceable or nonsilenceable and may also be programmed for steady or coded operation Coded operation provides a choice between March Time Temporal California coding and two stage operation 4 16 Synchronized NAC Operation Synchronization is a panel feature that controls the activation of notification appliances in suc
215. on Note 4XTMF Module is not suitable for transmitting reverse polarity supervisory signal l Remote Alarm power limited Wiring from these terminals can exit the protected Remote Trouble power limited premises Dummy load terminals 6 and 7 4 7KQ Ya No connection watt resistor if Municipal Box is not connected Municipal Box nonpower limited 1234567 Polarities are shown for module activation Disconnect LED 0000000 4xtmfl wmf m 1 Mo CEEE Disconnect Switch pur l E shown in disconnect wu l P position TBL Jumper Connect to FACP J10 amp J11 Figure 2 15 4XTMF Transmitter Module The following steps must be followed when installing the 4XTMF module 1 Remove all power AC and DC from the FACP before installing 4XTMF 2 Cut jumper JP6 on the main circuit board to allow the control panel to supervise the 4X TMF module 3 The NACKEY Card must be separated at the score mark to allow connection of the 4X TMF module refer to Figure 2 6 on page 48 for complete information 4 Carefully plug the connectors on the 4XTMF module into connectors J10 and J11 on the FACP main circuit board being careful not to bend any pins 5 Secure 4XTMF module to standoffs with supplied screws 6 Reapply power to the FACP 7 For proper 4XTMF operation the output relays must be programmed for the factory default settings as shown on the PC board silkscreen Alarm Relay Trouble Relay
216. on is available only for addressable smoke detectors not conventional smoke detectors 4 21 Walktest Walktest is a feature which allows one person to test the fire alarm system An audible walktest will momentarily sound the Notification Appliance Circuits in the building and store the walktest information in a file at the panel A silent walktest will not sound the NACs but will store the walk test information in a file which can be viewed at the panel Disabled NAC devices will not activate during walktest Alarm Shorted Condition When in audible Walktest the panel responds to each new alarm and activates its programmed con trol outputs for four seconds if those outputs have been programmed for silenceable activation It also stores each alarm in the walktest history file which can be sent to an optional printer The stored display will be the same as if the device actually activated except the colon in the time stamp is replaced with an asterisk Open Condition Addressable devices are monitored for fault conditions during Walktest mode When a new trouble condition occurs the FACP will activate all NACs and control modules programmed for Walktest and mapped to the faulted device then shut them off after eight seconds While in Walktest the trouble relay is activated and the system Trouble LED flashes as in all of the Program and status change operations The alarm relay is not activated 4 22 Read Status 160 Read
217. one Requirement and Warnings section of the DACT UD2 Installation and Programming Manual Document 53037 before proceeding with this step Connect the premises primary and secondary phone lines to the DACT UD2 as illustrated in Figure 2 14 and test the system for correct operation 54 MS 9600LS Series Manual P N 52646 B2 2 12 2010 Optional Modules and Devices Installation Primary Lines Secondary Lines Incoming Telco Phone Incoming Telco Phone Lines Lines Ring Green Wire Tip Red Wire Tip Green Wire Ring Ring To premises phones To premises phones Ring Red Wire Tip Tip 1123 4 5 6 7 8 1 23 4 5 6 7 8 RJ31 X RJ31 X Jack Jack T Note Shorting bars inside RJ31X Jack f i removed during male plug insertion Secondary Phone Line SEC pp 7 foot cable lt Primary Phone Line PRI lt _ MCBL 7 ______ gt order separately x Bins Male Plug Connectors ia A CAUTION It is critical that the device on the incoming telephone DACT UDZ2 be located as the first circuit to properly function Female vl Connectors i s A AYVGNOSAS AYVINIAd J O DACT UD2 i 9600jacj wmf Figure 2 14 Wiring Phone Jacks 2 6 2 4XTMF Transmitter Module Installation The 4XTMF provides a supervi
218. onnect the SLC wiring and devices to TB8 on the SLC Expander Module Refer to the SLC Wiring Manual for wiring information 6 Reapply power to the control panel 7 Program the addressable devices connected to the SLC 2LS Expander Module as detailed in Master Programming Level on page 65 8 Test the system for proper operation SLC Loop 1 Shield B SLC Loop 2 Shield A_ Shield B SLC A Shield A SLC B SLC A SLC B SLC A SLC B 000000 SLC TB8 O Remove four screws and replace with four supplied metal standoffs OPT SLC J ES ES ES gt pal S bol O bo FS J3 292029292900209 G 96optsic wmf O FACP SLC 2LS Expander Module Figure 2 17 SLC 2LS Expander Module Installation 2 6 5 Printer PC A serial printer or a PC personal computer may be connected to TB7 Terminals 1 4 on the FACP The printer can be used to provide a hard copy printout of real time events history file and walktest data An IBM compatible PC can be connected to provide local FACP programming capabilities using the PS Tools programming utility Installation of either device requires panel programming to allow the FACP to communicate with the device A parallel printer may also be connected to the FACP using the optional ANN S PG Serial Parallel Interface Module Refer to ANN S PG Serial Parallel Interface Installation on page 30 for 5
219. oop resistance is 40 ohms Supervised and power limited Refer to SLC Wiring Manual for wiring information NOTE When installing SLC wiring in conduit each loop must be installed in separate conduit Notification Appliance Circuits TB4 Special Application power Power limited circuitry supervised NAC wiring requirements refer to NAC Wiring on page 197 Nominal operating voltage 24 VDC Current limit fuseless electronic power limited circuitry MS 9600LS Series Manual P N 52646 B2 2 12 2010 15 Product Description Specifications Maximum signaling current per circuit 3 00 amps see Figure 1 1 on page 17 End of Line Resistor 4 7 KO watt P N 71252 UL listed for NACs Refer to Device Compatibility Document for listed compatible devices Two Programmable and One Fixed Output Relay TB1 amp TB5 Contact rating 2 0 amps 30 VDC resistive 0 5 amps 30 VAC resistive Form C relays Refer to Figure 2 5 on page 47 for information on power limited wiring for relay circuits Four Wire Resettable Special Application Smoke Detector Power 24 VDC nominal TB3 Terminals 1 amp 2 Maximum ripple voltage 10 mVzys Up to 1 5 amps is available for powering 4 wire smoke detectors see Figure 1 1 Power limited circuit nonsupervised Refer to Device Compatibility Document for listed compatible devices Nonresettable Special Application Power 1 24 VDC Nominal TB3 Terminals 3 amp 4 Maximu
220. operator to view additional programming information about the selected device such as Enable Disable Status Device Type Alarm Verification On Off Walktest Yes No PAS Positive Alarm Sequence Yes No Pre Signal Yes No Zone Assignments five maximum Chamber Reading Adjective Noun descriptor Silenceable Yes No for control modules 4 22 2 Zones Pressing 2 while viewing Read Status Screen 1 will cause the following screens to be displayed READ STATUS 1 SYSTEM POINT 2 20NES 3 POWER Read Status Screen 1 ZONES 1 Z0HES INSTALLED 2 2Z0NES ENABLED S Z0NES DISABLED Zones Screen 1 ONES 1 SPECIAL PURPOSE 2 Z0NE TYPE S Z0NE MESSAGE Zones Screen 2 From the preceding screens the control panel operator can view Zones Installed all software zones programmed into the system 99 maximum Zones Enabled all software zones that are enabled Zones Disabled all software zones that have been disabled Special Purpose on or off programming for Special Purpose Zones 97 reserved for PAS 98 reserved for Pre signal and 99 reserved for future use Zone Type the Type assigned to each installed zone default is Alarm Zone Message the message assigned to each installed zone MS 9600LS Series Manual P N 52646 B2 2 12 2010 163 Operating Instructions Read Status 4 22 3 Power Pressing 3 while viewing Read Status Screen 1 will display the following screens POWER BATTERY orally 24 Y
221. or a period of 15 seconds plus a programmable time of up to 3 minutes Zone 97 however will activate immediately and may be used to connect a signal ing device to indicate PAS activation do not use a Notification Appliance Circuit for this purpose To enable the PAS feature press 2 while viewing the Edit Detector Screen 3 until the display reads PAS Yes Each press of the 2 key will cause the display to toggle between PAS Yes and PAS No Refer to Positive Alarm Sequence on page 158 For example if a detector with address 005 is to be configured for PAS operation e Select PAS Yes when editing the detector set to address 005 72 MS 9600LS Series Manual P N 52646 B2 2 12 2010 Master Programming Level Programming EDIT DETECTOR 1 WALKTEST 2 PAS 3 PRE SIGNAL Edit Detector Screen 3 EDIT DETECTOR 1 Z0NE ASSIGNMENT 1515 Edit Detector Screen 4 e Program the desired zone or zones to be activated by this detector in this example Z001 e Program an output such as a control module that is to be activated by detector 005 by assigning the same zone to it in this example Z001 Program an output such as a control module for PAS activation by assigning zone Z97 to it This control module may be connected to a signaling device used to indicate a PAS condition do not use a Notification Appliance Circuit for this purpose Enable zones Z001 and Special Purpose Zone PAS 97 and set the PAS delay
222. or responds to an SLC address that is set in the detector head using built in rotary decimal switches with the abil ity to select up to 159 addresses Note that a blinking LED on an intelligent detector indicates com munication between the detector and the control panel These devices 350 Series or newer can operate in CLIP mode Classic Loop Interface Protocol or LiteSpeed mode to provide a quicker response They are also compatible with older 300 Series devices Ifa mix of old and new series devices are installed on the same loop that loop must be programmed to operate in CLIP mode Refer to the SLC Wiring Manual for a complete list of com patible addressable detectors 1 6 2 Intelligent Addressable Modules Newer Series The newer series of Control Modules and Monitor Modules provide an interface between the con trol panel and conventional notification and initiating devices Each module can be set to respond to an address with built in rotary switches with the ability to select up to 159 addresses a tab on the address switch must be broken off to use addresses 100 159 A blinking LED on a monitor mod ule indicates communication between the module and the control panel These devices 350 Series or newer can operate in CLIP mode Classic Loop Interface Protocol or LiteSpeed mode to provide a quicker response They are also compatible with older 300 Series devices Ifa mix of old and new series devices are installed on the same loop the
223. osition For example to enter the letter B press the 2 4BC key three times to toggle through the characters 2 4 and B Press the right arrow key to move the cursor one position to the right and repeat the process to enter the next character To enter a space press the OZ key four times until a blank appears in the desired position When all characters have been entered press the Enter key to store the information The display will return to the Edit Monitor Screen 4 display ing the new information at the bottom of the screen Recall Increment Function In addition the user may use the Recall Increment function at any time when the cursor is on the first letter of the Adjective or Noun field as follows e If the zero key is pressed a 0 is placed in the first letter position e Ifthe zero key is then pressed a second time with no intervening key actions the entire Adjective field is replaced with the field entered for the previous device programmed and the cursor moves to the last character of the field Recall function The Recalled Adjective or Noun field may now be changed letter by letter e If the zero key is pressed again with no other intervening key actions and the last character in the field is a number 0 9 the number is incremented by one If the last character is a letter it changes to a 0 If the last character is 9 it goes to 0 e The above increment function may be repeated with each press of the zero key As
224. out the necessity to reset the control panel after each device activation Pressing 2 while viewing the Programming Screen 3 will cause the following Walktest options to be displayed WALK TEST 1 SILEHT 2 AUDIBLE S VIEW RESULT Walktest Screen To perform a silent walktest which will not sound the NACs press while viewing the Walktest Screen To perform an audible walktest which will sound the NACs press 2 while viewing the Walktest Screen When either option is chosen the panel will enter Walktest Mode and the follow ing screen will be displayed UNIT IH WALKTEST 1 VIEW WALKTEST LOG 2 VIEW POINTS S VIEW SUMMARY Unit In Walktest Screen From this screen it is possible to view the walktest log untested system points or a summary of the addressable devices tested during the current walktest The user can select between any of these screens without interrupting the current walktest session The walktest session will not end until the Unit In Walktest screen is exited by pressing the Escape key Pressing for View Walktest Log while viewing the Unit In Walktest screen will cause a screen sim ilar to one of the following two screens to be displayed ALARM MONITOR HO EVENTS IN NORTH CLASSROOM WALKTEST LOG 661 16 15A 620518 1Mb666 116 If there are no events in the current walktest session the first screen will be displayed indicating no events have been stored in the walktest log If any events have bee
225. played 2 Z0NES 3 POWER Read Status Screen 1 READ SYSTEM POINT SELECT LOOP 1 L00P 1 2 LOOP 2 The operator selects the loop containing the device to be read by pressing for Loop 1 or 2 for Loop 2 The following screen will then be displayed READ SYSTEM POINT SELECT TYPE 1 DETECTOR 2 MODULE The operator now selects the type of device which is to be viewed by pressing for Detector or 2 for Module If is pressed the display will change to the following screen READ SYSTEM POINT ee DETECTOR tr Entering the three digit detector address will cause the control panel to display the current status of the selected device For example if a detector with address 001 on loop is entered a display sim ilar to the following will appear NORMAL SMOKECPHOTO gt HORTH CLASSROOM z503 1061611 The information in the preceding display includes e NORMAL the present status could also be ALARM TROUBL DISABL etc e SMOKE PHOTO the device type which is a photoelectric smoke detector could also be ION for ionization smoke detector e NORTH CLASSROOM the Adjective Noun label for this device e Z005 the first of five possible assigned software zones 1D001 1 Loop 1 D Detector 001 Address 001 162 MS 9600LS Series Manual P N 52646 B2 2 12 2010 Read Status Operating Instructions Pressing the down arrow key while viewing the screen shown on the previous page will allow the
226. power 47 Default Programming 186 Delete Detector 68 Delete Module 79 Description control module 94 detector label 77 monitor module 87 Detector add 67 adding description 74 delete 68 edit 69 enable disable 71 screen display 70 type 71 verification 72 detector data 157 171 172 acceptable range 171 printout 171 Detector Programming 67 device addressing 100 Digital Alarm Communicator Transmitter see also DACT UD2 21 dimensions cabinet 44 DIRTY1 172 DIRTY2 172 Disable 96 Disable Point Maintenance Level 139 dress panel 19 22 drift compensation 14 172 definition 172 Drill 18 150 E earth ground 46 edit control module 88 detector 69 detector screens 70 module monitor 79 EIA 232 59 for PC Printer connection 16 see also Printer PC interface 14 EIA 485 for ACS annunciators 16 for LCD 80F 16 Enable 95 Enable Disable control module 89 detector 71 module monitor 81 End of Line Resistor Assembly 20 Enter key 64 Erase History 115 exiting programming 63 64 Read Status 63 64 Expander Module 57 see also SLC 2 21 MS 9600LS Series Manual P N 52646 B2 2 12 2010 Index F N F Maintenance 151 FACP see also Indicators 17 see also Fire Alarm Control Panel 13 Supervisory 191 Features 13 Trouble 151 Fire Alarm Control Panel LED annunciator ao see also FACP 13 Local Energy Municipal Box Service 55 Form C relay 19 47 59 Local Programming 62 Loop Setup 99 gt M general alarm zone 84 De s
227. r Standby and Alarm then sum the Standby and Alarm ampere hours 4 Multiply the sum by the derating factor of 1 2 to calculate the proper battery size in AH 5 Write the ampere hour requirements on the Protected Premises label located inside the cabinet door Secondary Standby Load Required Standby Time total from Table 5 3 Calculation 24 hours Column 3 xI 3 AH Primary Alarm Load Required Alarm Time total from Table 5 3 Calculation for 5 min enter 0 084 Column 2 for 10 min enter 0 168 xI El AH Sum of Standby and Alarm Ampere Hours AH Multiply by the Derating Factor x 12 Battery Size Total Ampere Hours Required AH Table 5 4 Total Secondary Power Requirements at 24 VDC 5 4 1 NFPA Battery Requirements NFPA 72 Local Proprietary Central Auxiliary and Remote Station Fire Alarm Systems require 24 hours of standby power followed by 5 minutes in alarm NFPA requires 24 hours of standby plus 15 minutes activation for audio systems The total ampere hours required cannot exceed 26 AH with an internal charger 5 4 2 Selecting and Locating Batteries Select sealed lead acid batteries that meet or exceed the total ampere hours calculated in Table 5 4 The control panel can charge batteries in the 12 AH to 26 AH range The control panel cabinet is capable of housing batteries up to 18 AH Batteries larger than 18 AH require the BB 26 BB 55F or other UL listed external battery cabin
228. r Supply Calculations e Secondary refers to the control panel s backup batteries All currents are given in amperes A Table 5 2 shows how to convert milliamperes and microamperes to full amperes To convert Multiply Example Milliamperes mA to mA x 0 001 3 mA x 0 001 0 003A amperes A Microamperes yA to HA x 0 000001 300 pA x 0 000001 0 0003 A amperes A Table 5 2 Converting to Full Amperes 5 3 2 How to Use Table 5 3 on page 176 to Calculate System Current Draw Use Table 5 3 on page 176 to calculate current draws as follows Enter the quantity of devices in all three columns 2 Enter the current draw where required Refer to the Device Compatibility Document for compatible devices and their current draw 3 Calculate the current draws for each in all columns 4 Sum the total current for each column 5 Copy the totals from Column 2 and Column 3 to Table 5 4 on page 177 Following are the types of current that can be entered into Table 5 3 on page 176 Y Calculation Column 1 The primary supply current load that the control panel must support during a non fire alarm condition with AC power applied Y Calculation Column 2 The primary supply current load that the control panel must support during a fire alarm condition with AC power applied Y Calculation Column 3 The standby current drawn from the batteries in a non fire alarm condition during a loss of AC power MS 9600LS S
229. r Term Enabled Yes MS 9600LS Series Manual P N 52646 B2 2 12 2010 Master Programming Level Programming m ACS Options A Geico Pressing 2 for ACS Options while viewing the Annunciators screen will display the following 2 AC5 OPTIONS screen S ANN BUS OPTIONS Annunciator Screen ACS OPTIONS 1 ACS ENABLED HO 2 ACS INSTALLED S UDACT HO Pressing while viewing the ACS Options screen will cause the display to toggle between ACS Enabled Yes and ACS Enabled No To install an ACS annunciator the display must read ACS Enabled Yes If ACS has been enabled press 2 while viewing the ACS Options screen to select addresses for the ACS annunciators The following screen will be displayed ANHUNCIATOR J 1 ADDRESS 1 WES 2 ADORESS 2 HO 3 ADDRESS 3 HO ACS Installed Screen Pressing the down arrow key will allow the programmer to view additional screens displaying Addresses 1 31 Each screen will indicate if an address has been used for an installed ACS annun ciator To select one or more addresses for the installed ACS annunciator s press the number key corresponding to the address in each screen The display for the selected address will change from No to Yes Each press of the number key will cause the display to toggle between No and Yes The address of each installed annunciator must be enabled to allow communication between the FACP and annunciator MS 9600LS Series Manual P N 52646 B2 2 12 2010 119 P
230. ramming 3 6 3 Zone Setup Pressing 3 while viewing Programming Screen 1 will access the Zone Setup screens as illustrated 1 AUTOPROGRAM below 2 POINT PROGRAM 3 Z0NE SETUP Programming Screen 2 OHE SETUP 1 EMABLE 2 DISABLE S Z0NE 97 98 99 Zone Setup Screen 1 ONE SETUP 1 Z20NES INSTALLED 2 2DHES ENABLED 3 ZDHES DISABLED Zone Setup Screen 2 OHNE SETUP 1 2DHE TYPES 2 Z0NES AVAILABLE 3 ZDHE MESSAGE Zone Setup Screen 3 ZONE SETUP Enable 1 ENABLE 2 DISA Pressing for Enable while viewing Zone Setup Screen 1 will display the following screen BLE 3 Z0HE 97 98 99 Zone Setup Screen 1 ZONE TO ENABLE Enable Screen This screens allows the programmer to enable zones one at a time A flashing cursor appears next to the Z prompting the programmer to enter a two digit zone number 01 99 When the second digit is entered the zone will be enabled and the cursor returns to the original position next to the Z Another zone can then be enabled MS 9600LS Series Manual P N 52646 B2 2 12 2010 95 Programming Master Programming Level ZONE SETUP Disabig PELEA Pressing 2 for Disable while viewing Zone Setup Screen 1 will display the following screen 3 Z0HE 97 98 99 Zone Setup Screen 1 ZONE TO DISABLE X Disable Screen This screen allows the programmer to disable zones one at a time A flashing cursor appears next to the Z prompting the programmer to e
231. ration on page 153 for a description of the information displayed on the control panel LCD 4 7 Process Monitor Operation Process Monitor operation will initiate the following events The piezo sounder pulses Y second On and 4 second Off The LCD displays a process monitor message along with the device name type address adjective noun associated zones and time date Relays programmed for process monitoring will be activated The alarm relay is not activated Silenced alarms are not resounded Timers are not started Store event in history buffer Process Monitor condition must be Acknowledged before the FACP can be reset Note that like supervisories process monitor signals latch except when programmed for process monitor autoresettable and can be assigned to software zones 4 8 Hazard Condition Operation Hazard Condition operation will initiate the following events The piezo sounder turns on steady The LCD displays a hazard message along with the device name type address adjective noun associated zones and time date Relays programmed for process monitoring will be activated The alarm relay is not activated Silenced alarms are not resounded Timers are not started Store event in history buffer Hazard condition must be Acknowledged before the FACP can be reset Hazard conditions latch and will therefore clear only when the hazard condition is cleared and the panel reset They can be assigned to software zones
232. reen 3 HISTORY 1 VIEW EVENTS 2 ERASE HISTORY History Screen View Events foobar Dues Pressing J while viewing the History Screen will allow the user to select the events to be viewed as 2 ERASE HISTORY illustrated in the following HISTORY 1 VIEW ALL 2 4TEW ALARMS S VIEW OTHER EVENTS History Screen View Events Screen While displaying the View Events screen press to view all events 2 to view only alarms or 3 to view other events Use the up and down arrow keys to scroll through all of the displayed events Erase History The Erase History option allows a user to erase all events from the history file This will provide a clean slate in order to use the history file to track future events Pressing 2 while viewing the His tory Screen will cause the following screen to be displayed ERASE HISTORY PROCEED 1 WES 2 H Erase History Screen Pressing while viewing the Erase History Screen will erase all events from the History file Dur ing this process the display will read as follows ERASING HISTORY PLEASE WAIT Erase History Wait Screen After the History file has been erased the display will return to the History Screen MS 9600LS Series Manual P N 52646 B2 2 12 2010 115 Programming Master Programming Level 3 6 8 Walktest PROGRAMMING 1 HISTORY 2 WALKTEST 3 DPTION MODULES Programming Screen 3 Walktest allows an individual to test the fire alarm system with
233. resistive Operating Temperature 32 F to 120 F 0 C to 49 C For indoor use in a dry location only 36 MS 9600LS Series Manual P N 52646 B2 2 12 2010 Accessories Product Description m Mounting Installation The ANN RLY relay module can be mounted inside the FACP main circuit board chassis or inside the ROME Series enclosure Refer to the ANN RLY Installation Document 53033 for instructions on chassis mounting or to the ROME Series Installation Document 53530 for mounting in the sep arate backbox FACP Chassis Installation FACP Backbox Installation using ANN MBRLY mounting bracket ROME Series Installation using ANN MBRLY mounting bracket o o mounting I holes BE El cues E EE ann rlyinchassis wmf o e solos mounting hooks through mounting slots grounding wire mounting holes yincab3 wmf ann_mbri ANN MBRLY fa mounting bracket YN O O ANN RLY ot mounting holes 0 a mounting holes i MT ANN RLY on ANN MBRLY mounting bracket mounting holes Figure 1 14 ANN RLY Mounting Options MS 9600LS Series Manual P N 52646 B2 2 12 2010 rome relay plate3 wmf 37 Product Descript
234. resses 65 128 31 Loop 1 Detector Addresses 129 159 amp Loop 2 Detector Addresses 129 159 32 not used The 8 General System Status Points include the following e General Alarm e General Trouble e General Supervisory e Alarm Silenced System Off Normal AC Loss e Battery Fault NAC Fault Pressing 3 while viewing the ACS Options screen will toggle the display between UDACT NO and UDACT YES This allows the connection of an external UDACT Universal Digital Alarm Com municator Transmitter 120 MS 9600LS Series Manual P N 52646 B2 2 12 2010 Master Programming Level Programming m ANN BUS Options jafeee Ge TIGR Pressing 3 for ANN BUS Options while viewing the Annunciators screen will cause the following 2 ACS OPTIONS screens to be displayed S ANN BUS OPTIONS Annunciator Screen ANH BUS yl 1 EWNABLED HO 2 MODULES INSTALLED S AUTO COMFIGURE ANN BUS Screen 1 ANN BUS 2 1 ANN S PG OPTIONS 2 ANHN 58 OPTIONS ANN BUS Screen 2 A printer module graphic annunciator module LCD annunciator module LED annunciator mod ule and relay module can be programmed into the system These devices communicate with the FACP over the ANN BUS terminals on the control panel ANN BUS Enabled The ANN BUS must be enabled if any modules are connected to the ANN BUS terminals To enable the ANN BUS press while viewing ANN BUS screen 1 so that the display reads Enabled Yes Each press of t
235. ressing while viewing Point Program Screen 2 will allow the programmer to add delete or change the programming of an addressable detector The following screen will be displayed by the control panel DETECTOR 1 ADD 2 DELETE S EDIT Detector Screen Add Detector Pressing while viewing the Detector Screen will display the following screen which allows the programmer to add a new detector address to programming ADD DETECTOR ENTER DETECTORS tr Add Detector Screen MS 9600LS Series Manual P N 52646 B2 2 12 2010 67 Programming Master Programming Level A flashing cursor will appear in the position of the first asterisk to the left The programmer keys in the three digit detector address such as 005 When the last digit is keyed in the following screen will be displayed DETECTOR TYPE Ll 1 SMOKELPHOTO 2 USER DEFINED 1 S SMOKECIONS Press the down arrow key to view additional choices Press the number corresponding to the desired selection to program that type to the newly added detector When the type has been selected the following screen will be displayed ADD DETECTOR DETECTOR BES IS ADDED The programmer can continue adding detectors by pressing the ESC or left arrow key which will return the display to the Add Detector Screen m Delete Detector DETECTOR Pressing 2 in the Detector Screen will display the Delete Detector Screen which allows the pro 1 ADD grammer to delete a spec
236. return to AC Loss Delay Screen 1 NAC Notification Appliance Circuit SYSTEM SETUP 1 TIMERS 2 HAC The options for the NACs on the control panel main circuit board can be set by pressing 2 while 3 RELAYS viewing System Setup Screen 2 The following screens will be displayed System Setup Screen 2 NAC Selection Screen The Notification Appliance Circuits can be configured independently by pressing for NAC 1 2 for NAC 2 3 for NAC 3 or 4 for NAC 4 Note that 3 NAC 3 and 4 NAC 4 will only be displayed if the NACKEY NAC option card is installed in JP8 of the main circuit board for Class B operation MS 9600LS Series Manual P N 52646 B2 2 12 2010 107 Programming Master Programming Level The following screens will be displayed for either selection HAC Y 1 EMABLED 2 TWPE 3 SILEHCEABLE NAC Screen 1 HAC Y 1 AUTO SILENCE als 2 CODING TEMPORAL NAC Screen 2 HAC Y 1 20HE 66 BG 66 66 HG 2 SIL INHIBITED WO NAC Screen 3 HAC Y 1 SYHC TYPE NAC Screen 4 m Enabled Pressing while viewing NAC Screen 1 will cause the display to change to Enabled No This will prevent the selected main circuit board NAC from activating its devices Each press of the key will cause the display to toggle between Enabled Yes and Enabled No 108 MS 9600LS Series Manual P N 52646 B2 2 12 2010 Master Programming Level Programming MAC 4 1 ENABLED 2 TYPE 3 SILENCEABLE NAC Scre
237. ring optional Dress Panel eo00000000000000000 00000000000000000000000 q venting holes on top of 000000000000000000 000000000000000000000000 box 4 13 cm 16 65 42 29 cm gt i 5 2 325 5 91 cm em 4 6255 12 00 30 48 cm gt lt 1 6255 A l e 17 830m i 7 02 gt ea ee Ney o FF 44 A H 45cm Mounting u slots for TEN 19 optional A O AA Trim Rings Vel A NM ES l 4 45cm o 4 ake 1 75 I vol y Yy E v aka 10 A 0 A A A Og ge og a te O atl KEA Semi flusH T mounting Oi hole v t m 1 2 00 gt 16 00 40 64 cm gt 5 207 4 128 cm E 13 23 cm Hinge Slot for 1 optional Dress Panel 4 535 13 23 cm Mi EN 11 52 cm 5 207 E 1 00 2 54 cm te 5 y i Y 5 T 3 151 305 S 3 30 cm Figure 2 2 FACP Cabinet Mounting MS 9600LS Series Manual P N 52646 B2 2 12 2010 Mounting Installation Top Left Side Door 19 26 48 92 cm Backbox 19 0 48 26 cm Bottom Cie na gt ee a SS pS Eis ES ES ER e E Te eS e E 1 UN Va Woe Sag Wag Sg iF 1 Y 1 y lA y 1 NA NS A c ran can MY Depth 5 207 13 23 cm Door 16 821 42 73 cm lt Backbox 16 65 42 29 cm Depth 5 325 gt ES cm Right Side Figure 2 3 FACP Cabinet Dimensions MS 9600LS Series Manual P N 52646 B2 2 12 2010
238. rogramming Master Programming Level Annunciator addressing is specific to the FACP control panel The following table describes the annunciator addresses and the corresponding addressable devices that will be annunciated at each annunciator address ACS Annunciator Address Annunciator Displays the Following Points 1 8 General System Status Points amp Zones 1 56 2 Zones 57 99 amp 4 NACs 3 Loop 1 Module Addresses 1 64 4 Loop 2 Module Addresses 1 64 5 Loop 1 Module Addresses 65 128 6 Loop 2 Module Addresses 65 128 7 Loop 1 Module Addresses 129 159 amp Loop 2 Module Addresses 129 159 8 Loop 1 Detector Addresses 1 64 9 Loop 2 Detector Addresses 1 64 10 Loop 1 Detector Addresses 65 128 11 Loop 2 Detector Addresses 65 128 12 Loop 1 Detector Addresses 129 159 8 Loop 2 Detector Addresses 129 159 13 not used 14 not used 15 not used 16 not used 17 not used 18 not used 19 not used 20 8 General System Status Points amp Zones 1 56 21 Zones 57 99 amp 4 NACs 22 Loop 1 Module Addresses 1 64 23 Loop 2 Module Addresses 1 64 24 Loop 1 Module Addresses 65 128 25 Loop 2 Module Addresses 65 128 26 Loop 1 Module Addresses 129 159 amp Loop 2 Module Addresses 129 159 27 Loop 1 Detector Addresses 1 64 28 Loop 2 Detector Addresses 1 64 29 Loop 1 Detector Addresses 65 128 30 Loop 2 Detector Add
239. rrent Alarm and Standby 45 mA e Ambient Temperature 32 F to 120 F 0 C to 49 C e Max Wiring Distance from FACP 6 000 ft 1 800 m e Mounting Surface Dimensions 6 W x 7 3 4 H x 1 7 16 D 15 2 cm W x 19 7 cm H x 3 7 cm D For indoor use in a dry location only m PRN 6F Printer Installation When connected to the FACP via the ANN S PG module the PRN 6F prints the status changes within the control panel and time stamps the printout with the time of day and date that the event occurred It provides 80 columns of data on standard 9 x 11 tractor feed paper This section con tains information on connecting a printer to the control panel and setting the printer options Connecting PRN 6F Printer Remote printers require a primary AC power source If required for the fire alarm system configu ration for example a Proprietary Fire Alarm System a remote printer requires a secondary power source battery backup Since a secondary power source is not provided as a standard feature a separate UL listed Uninterruptible Power Supply UPS should be used The building emergency power supply may be used as long as it meets the power continuity requirements of NFPA 72 Refer to NFPA 72 for further details Connect the remote printer to the FACP via the ANN S PG module using a standard DB 25 cable One end of the cable will plug into the DB 25 connector on the PRN printer and the other end plugs into the parallel connector o
240. rth Fault Battery Fault Charger Fault Disabled Maintenance Zone 00 Zone 01 Zone 02 Zone 03 Zone 04 Active Alarm Active Alarm Active Alarm Active Alarm Active Alarm Zone 00 Zone 01 Zone 02 Zone 03 Zone 04 Trouble Trouble Trouble Trouble Trouble Zone 00 Zone 01 Zone 02 Zone 13 Zone 04 Supervisory Supervisory Supervisory Supervisory Supervisory Zone 05 Zone 06 Zone 07 Zone 08 Zone 09 Active Alarm Active Alarm Active Alarm Active Alarm Active Alarm Zone 05 Zone 06 Zone 07 Zone 08 Zone 09 Trouble Trouble Trouble Trouble Trouble Zone 05 Zone 06 Zone 07 Zone 08 Zone 09 Supervisory Supervisory Supervisory Supervisory Supervisory ANN LED Module 1 Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Zone 10 Zone 11 Zone 12 Zone 13 Zone 14 Active Alarm Active Alarm Active Alarm Active Alarm Active Alarm Zone 10 Zone 11 Zone 12 Zone 13 Zone 14 Trouble Trouble Trouble Trouble Trouble Zone 10 Zone 11 Zone 12 Zone 13 Zone 14 Supervisory Supervisory Supervisory Supervisory Supervisory Zone 15 Zone 16 Zone 17 Zone 18 Zone 19 Active Alarm Active Alarm Active Alarm Active Alarm Active Alarm Zone 15 Zone 16 Zone 17 Zone 18 Zone 19 Trouble Trouble Trouble Trouble Trouble Zone 15 Zone 16 Zone 17 Zone 18 Zone 19 Supervisory Supervisory Supervisory Supervisory Supervisory ANN LED Module 2 The LED assignments for the modules annunciating Zone Ranges 20 29 30
241. ry while viewing the Unit In Walktest screen will display a new screen which will show a total of the tested detectors tested modules untested detectors and untested modules for the current walktest session If more than one SLC loop is installed on the FACP pressing the down arrow key will display the Walktest summary for each SLC loop The user can perform a one person walktest by activating devices throughout the system As each device is activated the information about the activated device is stored in the Walktest Log The information can be viewed by choosing one of the options from the Unit In Walktest screen To end the Walktest session press the Escape key to return to the Walktest screen Pressing 3 for View Results while viewing the Walktest screen after a walktest session has been completed will allow the operator to view the final results of the most recent walktest The following screen will be displayed WALKETEST RESULTS View Result Screen Use the up and down arrow keys to view all of the walktest results which will be displayed Note that the Walktest log is stored in RAM If all power AC and DC is removed from the FACP the Walktest log information will be lost This information is also overwritten when subsequent walk tests are performed 3 6 9 Option Modules Options available for the FACP include ACS Graphic LED Relay and LCD annunciators printer connection for acquiring hardcopy printouts of panel data and
242. s an alarm the onboard piezo sounds immediately but the NACs are not activated for a user pro grammed time duration of up to three minutes Note that the alarm relay and communicator will respond to the initial alarm immediately In addition Zone 98 will activate This zone can be pro grammed to a control module which may be used to activate a sounder or indicator which the installer designates as a Presignal indication Do not assign Zone 98 to a Notification Appliance Circuit when using this zone to indicate a Pre signal condition After the programmed delay the NACs will activate if the source of the alarm is not cleared Note that if a second alarm occurs during the programmed time delay the alarm will be processed imme diately causing activation of the appropriate output zones The events which occur upon Presignal activation are as follows onboard piezo sounds immediately e control panel LCD display will indicate a presignal event and the active point e control points programmed to Zone 98 will activate e annunciators if enabled will sound the local piezo and pulse the alarm LED and zone LED outputs NACs and control modules of associated zones will be inhibited from activating for a user programmed time delay of up to three minutes e second alarm occurring anytime during the time delay will cause immediate activation of all associated outputs Presignal does not affect monitor modules programmed as waterflow supervisory
243. s follows AC Power This is a green LED which illuminates if AC power is applied to the FACP A loss of AC power will turn off this LED Fire Alarm This red LED flashes when one or more alarms occur It illuminates steady when the Acknowl edge Step or Alarm Silence key is pressed The Fire Alarm LED turns off when the Reset key is pressed The LED will remain off if all alarms have been cleared MS 9600LS Series Manual P N 52646 B2 2 12 2010 Normal Operation Operating Instructions Supervisory This is a yellow LED that flashes when one or more supervisory conditions occur such as a sprin kler valve tamper condition It illuminates steady when the Acknowledge Step or Alarm Silence key is pressed It turns off when the Reset key is pressed and remains off if all supervisory alarms have been cleared Trouble This is a yellow LED that flashes when one or more trouble conditions occur It stays on steady when the Acknowledge Step or Alarm Silence key is pressed The LED turns off when all trouble conditions are cleared This LED will also illuminate if the microprocessor watchdog circuit is activated Maintenance This is a yellow LED that flashes to indicate that a smoke detector requires cleaning or replacement due to an invalid chamber reading or excessive drift Alarm Silenced This is a yellow LED that turns on after the Alarm Silence key is pressed while an alarm condition exists It turns off when the Drill or Re
244. seconds for each of four possible delay options MS 9600LS Series Manual P N 52646 B2 2 12 2010 165 Operating Instructions Read Status 4 22 6 NAC Pressing 3 while viewing Read Status Screen 2 will display the following screen Note that 3 NAC 3 and 4 NAC 4 will only be displayed if the NACKEY NAC option card is installed in JP8 of the main circuit board for Class B operation The operator can press to view the programmed options for NAC 1 2 to view the programmed options for NAC 2 3 to view the programmed options for NAC 3 or 4 to view the programmed options for NAC 4 The resulting screens will display the following information Enable Disable Status e Circuit Type Bell Strobe etc e Silenceable Nonsilenceable e Auto Silence Enable Disable and time delay e Coding Selection Temporal Steady etc Zone Assignments e Silence Inhibit Enabled Disabled e Synchronization Type System Sensor Wheelock or Gentex 4 22 7 Relays a ae STATUS Pressing while viewing Read Status Screen 3 will display the following screen 1 2 3 PROGRAM CHECK HISTORY Read Status Screen 3 RELAYS 1 RELAY 1 2 RELAY 2 S RELAY 3 The operator can view the programmed option for each relay by pressing the corresponding number key 166 MS 9600LS Series Manual P N 52646 B2 2 12 2010 Read Status Operating Instructions 4 22 8 Program Check Pressing 2 while viewing Read Status Screen 3 will cause
245. sed output for a local energy municipal box transmitter in addition to alarm and trouble reverse polarity A jumper option allows the reverse polarity circuit to open with a system trouble condition if no alarm condition exists A disable switch allows disabling of the transmitter output during testing to prevent accidental calling of the monitoring service Local Energy Municipal Box Service NFPA 72 Auxiliary Fire Alarm Systems Supervisory Current 5 0 mA Trip Current 350 mA subtracted from notification appliance power Coil Voltage 3 65 VDC Maximum Coil Resistance 14 6 ohms Maximum allowable wire resistance between panel and trip coil 3 ohms Municipal Box wiring can leave the building MS 9600LS Series Manual P N 52646 B2 2 12 2010 55 Installation Optional Modules and Devices 56 Remote Station Service NFPA 72 Remote Station Fire Alarm Systems Intended for connec tion to a polarity reversal circuit or a Remote Station receiving unit having compatible rat ings Maximum load for each circuit 10 mA Reverse polarity output voltage 24 VDC Remote Alarm and Remote Trouble wiring can leave the building Before installing the module place the disconnect switch to the right disconnect position to pre vent accidental activation of the municipal box Note that a Disconnect LED will illuminate after the module is installed in the FACP In addition the System Trouble LED will turn on to indicate the Disconnect conditi
246. set key is pressed Disabled This is a yellow LED that flashes to indicate that a zone NAC detector or module has been tempo rarily disabled in programming by the user Battery This is a yellow LED that flashes to indicate a low battery voltage condition Ground This is a yellow LED that turns on steady to indicate a ground fault condition zero impedance between FACP and ground 4 3 Normal Operation With no alarms or troubles in the system the display message is System All Normal along with the current time and date as shown below To set the time and date refer to the appropriate section in this manual HONEYWELL LIFE SAFETY SYSTEM ALL NORMAL 16 66A 618818 The FACP performs the following functions at regular intervals while in Normal mode e Monitors AC input voltage and battery voltage e Monitors and reports status of SLC loop s option cards and control panel e Polls all devices on the SLC loop s and flashes each device LED while checking for valid replies alarms troubles etc Refreshes LCD display and updates time Scans control panel keypad for key presses e Performs autotest for all SLC devices e Tests memory e Updates and reads all communications busses EIA 485 EIA 232 etc MS 9600LS Series Manual P N 52646 B2 2 12 2010 151 Operating Instructions Trouble Operation 4 4 Trouble Operation 152 With no alarms in the system the detection of a trouble will cause the following
247. sing 2 while viewing the Printer PC Screen will program the control panel for a supervised SU printer Printer supervision when enabled will typically detect the removal of the printer cable and will detect when the printer power has been turned off Depending upon the brand of printer other errors such as paper empty or printer off line may be detected Enabling either printer option will cause the following screen to appear which allows the program mer to select the baud rate for the printer communication PRINTER BAUD RATE 1 2466 BAUD 2 4588 BAUD 5 9688 BAUD Printer Baud Rate Screen Pressing the number key corresponding to the desired baud rate 2 for 4800 Baud for example will program the control panel for the selected baud rate and return the display to the Option Module Screen which will indicate Printer PC PR4800 for a supervised printer installed at 4800 baud rate Pressing 3 while viewing the Printer PC Screen will program the control panel for a PC connection The display will return to the Option Module Screen which will indicate Printer PC PC for per sonal computer installed MS 9600LS Series Manual P N 52646 B2 2 12 2010 Master Programming Level Programming 3 6 10 Password Change Re RAMING i The factory set passwords which have been programmed into the control panel can be changed by 2 CLEAR PROGRAM selecting the Password Change option Pressing while viewing Programming Screen 4 will 3 PROGRAM C
248. splayed ERASE HISTORY PROCEED 1 ES 2 H Erase History Screen Pressing while viewing the Erase History Screen will cause the message ERASING HISTORY PLEASE WAIT to be displayed The display will then return to the History Screen Pressing 2 will cause the display to return to the History Screen without erasing the History file 3 7 3 Program Check PROGRAMMING 1 POINT PROGRAM 2 HISTORY 3 PROGRAM CHECK Maintenance Screen 1 Pressing 3 while viewing Maintenance Screen 1 will cause the following screen to be displayed PROGRAM CHECK 1 HACS NO INPUT 2 Z0HES HO INPUT S Z0NES HO OUTPUT Program Check Screen The Program Check feature allows the programmer to view the zones which have been pro grammed to the Notification Appliance Circuits on the control panel but have not been pro grammed to Initiating Devices as well as other circuits with no input or output correlations Pressing while viewing Program Check screen will cause a screen similar to the following to be displayed MACS NO INPUT HAC 1 20 31 44 35 67 The example above indicates that NAC 1 has been programmed to Zones 25 31 44 55 and 67 but no input devices have been programmed to any of these zones Use the up and down arrow keys to view all the NAC zones without input assignments for NAC1 NAC2 NAC3 and NAC4 NOTE Ifthe NACs have been configured for Class A in the Setup option only NAC1 and NAC2 will display test information N
249. stalled Y SW TBL indicating a module has failed the testing of its Class A switching relay Fourth line in display Time the current time in this example is 0 00A which represents 10 00 AM Date the current month day and year in this example is 0 for January 08 for the 8th day of the month and 0 for the year 2010 Device Address D00 in this example represents SLC Loop1 D represents a detector and 001 represents device address 001 Pressing the Acknowledge Step or Alarm Silence key will cause the pulsing piezo to silence and the system Trouble LED to change from flashing to on steady This block acknowledgment occurs regardless of the number of troubles alarms and supervisory events active in the system When the Acknowledge Step key is pressed and at least one new alarm or trouble exists in the system the acknowledge message is sent to the printer and history file If the trouble clears either before or after the Acknowledge Step key is pressed the clear trouble message is sent to the printer and his tory file If all troubles clear and there are no supervisory or fire conditions active in the system the system returns to normal mode operation and the System All Normal message is shown on the LCD display and sent to the history and printer files The auto restore feature will restore cleared troubles even if the troubles were never acknowledged Note that pressing the Alarm Silence key when only trou
250. sulting in reduced terminal contact pressure and difficulty with screw terminal removal This system contains static sensitive components Always ground yourself with a proper wrist strap before han dling any circuits so that static charges are removed from the body Use static suppressive packaging to protect electronic assemblies removed from the unit Follow the instructions in the installation operating and pro gramming manuals These instructions must be followed to avoid damage to the control panel and associated equipment FACP operation and reliability depend upon proper installation Precau D1 9 2005 Canadian Requirements This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class A limits for radiation noise emissions from digital apparatus set out in the Radio Interference Regulations of the Cana dian Department of Communications Le present appareil numerique n emet pas de bruits radioelectriques depassant les limites applicables aux appareils numeriques de la classe A prescrites dans le Reglement sur le brouillage radioelectrique edicte par le ministere des Communications du Canada LiteSpeed is a trademark and FireLite Alarms is a registered trademark of Honeywell International Inc Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks of the Microsoft Corporation OTuesday August 14 2012 9 31 am by Honeywell International Inc All rights reserved Unauthorized use of this document is strictly prohibited MS 9600L
251. t letter position e If the zero key is then pressed a second time with no intervening key actions the entire Adjective field is replaced with the field entered for the previous device programmed and the cursor moves to the last character of the field Recall function The Recalled Adjective or Noun field may now be changed letter by letter e Ifthe zero key is pressed again with no other intervening key actions and the last character in the field is a number 0 9 the number is incremented by one If the last character is a letter it changes to a 0 If the last character is 9 it goes to 0 The above increment function may be repeated with each press of the zero key As an example the user could quickly enter FLR_3 ROOM 305 as follows 1 The cursor is on the first letter of the Adjective field Press the zero key twice to display FLR_3 2 With the cursor on the first letter of the Noun field press the zero key twice to recall the display ROOM _304 The cursor automatically jumps from the first to the last letter of the Noun field 3 With the cursor on the last letter of the Noun field press the zero key again to increment the room number to 305 4 Press the right arrow key to advance the zone field 5 Select a zone number from 00 to 99 Z00 default zone is the general alarm zone Z01 through Z99 may be selected to link software zones MS 9600LS Series Manual P N 52646 B2 2 12 2010 Master Programming Level Prog
252. t programmed to _L activate on General Alarm Form C Trouble contact which will automat _ ically activate on any Trouble condition Central Office Line Limited Energy 150U0C Form C relay contact programmed to activate on Supervisory condition 0 1 amps max McCulloh Circuit Central Office Line Limited Energy 150UDC 0 1 saps max McCulloh Circuit Trouble amp Alarm nyg mog E eo 05 increase Motor 5peed Control aloja Power Input See Mote 1 2 A a Shunt olololo Potter Electric Signal Company Transmitter Model EFT C used to transmit Alarm and Trouble Signals Speed Control SENOS Poses Inpit B See Hote 1 ar S Return Feed Shunt elol lo Potter Electric Signal Company Transmitter Model EFT C used to transmit Alarm and Trouble Signals Figure C 5 Proprietary Protective Signaling System Notes 1 Connection between the FACP and the transmitter are supervised by the transmitter 2 This FACP Transmitter arrangement can be employed for NFPA 72 Proprietary Protective Signaling System 3 Potter Electric Model EFT C has not been tested for UL 864 9th Edition and is for use in retrofit applications only 192
253. t the bottom Carefully unpack the system and check for shipping damage Mount the cabinet in a clean dry vibration free area where extreme temperatures are not encountered The area should be readily accessible with sufficient room to easily install and maintain the panel Locate the top of the cabi net approximately 5 feet 1 5 m above the floor with the hinge mounting on the left Determine the number of conductors required for the devices to be installed Sufficient knockouts are provided for wiring convenience Select the appropriate knockout s and pull the conductors into the box All wiring should be in accordance with the National and or Local codes for fire alarm systems 2 1 Mounting 42 The circuit board contains static sensitive components Always ground yourself with a proper wrist strap before handling any boards so that static charges are removed from the body Use static suppressive packaging to protect electronic assemblies e Mark and predrill holes in the wall for the center top keyhole mounting bolt using the dimen sions illustrated in Figure 2 2 on page 44 e Install center top fastener in the wall with the screw head protruding e Place backbox over the top screw level and secure e Mark and drill the left and right upper and lower mounting holes Note outer holes closest to sidewall are used for 16 O C stud mounting e Install remaining fasteners and tighten e Attach solid earth ground wire to grounding
254. ti Faki Zone Assignment Screen Note that Z represents the Zone Number s corresponding to this device The factory default for an unprogrammed device is Z00 for general alarm zone A flashing cursor will appear on the first 0 to the left Enter the two digit number corresponding to the zone that is to be assigned to this device The cursor moves to the next Z designation Continue entering zone assignments or the remaining zones can be left blank or programmed as general alarm zones Z00 When all desired changes have been made press the Enter key to store the zone assignments The display will return to the Edit Monitor Screen 4 Noun Adjective The Noun Adjective selection allows the programmer to enter specific descriptors about the moni tor module currently being programmed Pressing while viewing Edit Monitor Screen 5 will cause the following screen to be displayed 1 STANDARD ADJECTIVE 2 STANDARD HOLIN S CUSTOM ADJECTIVE 4 CUSTOM NOUN Noun Adjective Screen MS 9600LS Series Manual P N 52646 B2 2 12 2010 Master Programming Level Programming 1 STANDARD ADJECTIVE Pressing while viewing the Noun Adjective Screen will cause the following screen s to be dis 2 STANDARD NOUN played Note that the keyboard down arrow key must be pressed to see all the Adjective screens S CUSTOM ADJECTIVE Press the number corresponding to the adjective that is to be used as a descriptor for the location of 4 CUSTOM NOUN
255. timer to some value With the preceding program settings when the detector with address 005 is activated zone Z97 will cause its associated control module to activate immediately sounding the connected PAS sig naling device Following the PAS delay time zone Z001 will cause its associated control module to activate and the control panel will initiate an alarm condition Note that a detector can be enabled for either PAS or Pre signal but not both Pre signal The Pre signal option programs the detector to delay panel activation for a preprogrammed time delay of up to three minutes while allowing for visual verification by a person Note that the alarm relay and communicator will respond to the initial alarm immediately In addition Zone 98 will activate This zone can be programmed to a control module which may be used to activate a sounder or indicator which the installer designates as a Presignal indication do not use a Notifica tion Appliance Circuit for this purpose To enable the Pre signal feature press 3 while viewing Edit Detector Screen 3 until the display reads Pre signal Yes Each press of the 3 key will cause the display to toggle between Pre signal Yes and Pre signal No Refer to Presignal on page 158 For example if a detector with address 005 is to be configured for Pre Signal operation Select Pre signal Yes when editing the detector set to address 005 Program the desired zone or zones to be activated by this d
256. tion The ANN S PG Serial Parallel Interface module allows the connection of a remote serial or parallel printer to the FACP for a real time log of system events detector status reports and event history The module is provided with a plastic enclosure for surface mounting Proceed with the installation as described in the following Ensure that all power AC and DC has been removed from the FACP 2 Connect the ANN S PG to the FACP as illustrated in Figure 1 7 mm Parallel ANN BUS and power wiring are supervised and power limited A Cable Connectors for connection to printer Serial ANN S PG Module 24 VDC NS 4 nonresettable ACS BUS 9600Istospg wmf Figure 1 7 ANN S PG Connection to FACP 3 Using the DIP switches on the back of the ANN S PG module assign an ID number address to the module MS 9600LS Series Manual P N 52646 B2 2 12 2010 Accessories Product Description 4 Select the address and configuration options for the ANN S PG module as described in the Programming section of this manual refer to ANN BUS Options on page 121 Note that the Auto configure feature allows the programmer to quickly bring all installed ANN BUS modules online refer to Auto Configure on page 131 5 Connect a printer to the ANN S PG Parallel or Serial connectors refer to Figure 1 7 Only one printer can be connected m Specifications e Operating Voltage 24 VDC e Cu
257. tion The options selected for each of these modules will be the same for all modules of the same type refer to ANN S PG Print Options on page 132 and ANN 80 Options on page 133 If ANN I O ANN LED or ANN RLY is the selected module type the following ANN BUS Address Screen will be displayed ANH BUS MODULES ANH BUS ADDRESS 1 TYPE ANN 1D 2 MODULE OPTIONS ANN BUS Address Screen Since the options for each of these module types can be individually set pressing 2 for Module Options while viewing the ANN BUS Address Screen will display the available options as described below 122 MS 9600LS Series Manual P N 52646 B2 2 12 2010 Master Programming Level Programming ANN 1 0 Options Pressing 2 for Module Options while viewing ANN BUS Address Screen when the ANN I O option is selected will display the following screen ANH 1 0 ADDR SLC 1 MOD 461 636 ACTIVE LEDS ONLY ANN I O Address Screen 1 ANH 1 0 ADDR fl 1 PDINT ZONE POINT ANN I O Address Screen 2 ANH 1 0 ADDR 1 RANGE PT 1 836 2 DET MOD MOD 3 5LC LOOP 2 ANN I O Address Screen 3 The first screen indicates that the ANN I O at the selected ANN BUS address is programmed to annunciate SLC Loop 1 addressable modules with addresses through 30 The programming can be changed using ANN I O Address Screens 2 and 3 Pressing while viewing ANN I O Address Screen 2 will program the annunciator module to annunciate e
258. tion zone The display will return to the Zones Installed Screen showing zone Z02 and the Pull Station program type Repeat the procedure for each zone to be changed IMPORTANT In Zone Type Program Screen 1 selecting WATERFLOW will assign a Water flow silenceable zone type to the selected zone Any signaling devices programmed to the same zone can be silenced by pressing the Alarm Silence key or by using the auto silence feature To program a waterflow circuit as nonsilenceable refer to System Setup on page 100 NOTE Zone Types are only relevant for Central Station reporting Changing a zone type will only change how it is reported to the Central Staion Zones Available ea sien ABE Pressing 2 while viewing Zone Setup Screen 3 will display the following screen 3 Z0NE MESSAGE Zone Setup Screen 3 ZOHNES AVAILABLE I Hl 62 63 64 65 46 r 148 GS 69 16 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 15 19 20 21 The display will show all of the zones that are still available for programming Note that an up and or down arrow may appear in the upper right corner of the display indicating that additional screens of zone information exists Press the up or down arrow key to view additional screens MS 9600LS Series Manual P N 52646 B2 2 12 2010 Maintenance Programming Level Programming Zone Message Pressing 3 while viewing Zone Setup Screen 3 will display the following screen OHNE MESSAGE 1 266 HO MESSAGE 2 261 MESSAGE 1
259. tivate ACS annunciators if enabled will pulse the Zone 97 PAS LED immediately upon PAS activation They will sound the local piezo and pulse the alarm associated zone and detector address point LEDs after 15 seconds of an unacknowledged PAS activation Note that if the Alarm Silence or Acknowledge Step button is pressed the annunciators will be inhibited from activating for an additional time delay outputs NACs and control modules of associated zones will be inhibited from activating for a factory set duration of 15 seconds MS 9600LS Series Manual P N 52646 B2 2 12 2010 Special System Timers Operating Instructions pressing the Alarm Silence or Acknowledge Step key will start a timer which inhibits output activation for additional time delay of up to three minutes which is user programmable e second alarm occurring anytime during either time delay will cause immediate activation of all associated outputs PAS operation requires the approval of the local Authority Having Jurisdiction Note that the PAS BYPASS monitor type code when activated will inhibit the PAS capability until the PAS BYPASS monitor is deactivated While PAS is inhibited signaling devices will immedi ately place the control panel into alarm This feature may be employed by wiring a normally open device such as a switch to a monitor module which has been programmed for PAS BYPASS 4 20 Special System Timers 4 20 1 Silence Inhibit Timer This optio
260. tored in the control panel memory and the display will return to the Delay Screen which will indi cate the new delay time m Pre signal Delay The factory default setting for Pre signal delay is 000 for no delay To select a Pre signal delay of 001 to 180 seconds for all devices programmed for Pre signal press 2 while viewing Timer Screen 1 The following screen will be displayed PRESIGHAL DELAY RANGE 6 156 SECONDS S i S Pre signal Delay Screen MS 9600LS Series Manual P N 52646 B2 2 12 2010 105 Programming Master Programming Level TIMER 1 PAS DELAY 6866 2 PRE SIGNAL 668 S WATERFLOW 666 Timer Screen 1 TIM 1 AC LOSS DELAY Timer Screen 2 106 A flashing cursor is positioned in the lower left corner of the display Enter a delay time consisting of three digits such as 009 for nine seconds Upon entering the third digit the time delay will be stored in the control panel memory and the display will return to the Delay Screen which will indi cate the new delay time Note that the FACP can be programmed for either PAS or Pre signal operation not both Refer to Edit Detector on page 69 for programming details m Waterflow Delay A delay can be added prior to declaring a waterflow type of alarm Be careful to include any built in delays of the waterflow device The factory default setting for Waterflow delay is 000 for no delay To select a Waterflow delay of 01 to 90 seconds for al
261. trol module currently being programmed Pressing while viewing Edit Control Screen 4 will cause the following screen to be displayed Edit Control Screen 4 1 STANDARD ADJECTIVE 2 STANDARD HOLIN S CUSTOM ADJECTIVE 4 CUSTOM HOUN Noun Adjective Screen MS 9600LS Series Manual P N 52646 B2 2 12 2010 91 Programming Master Programming Level 1 STANDARD ADJECTIVE Pressing while viewing the Noun Adjective Screen will cause the following screen s to be dis 2 STANDARD NOUN played Note that the keyboard down arrow key must be pressed to see all the Adjective screens S CUSTOM ADJECTIVE press the number corresponding to the adjective that is to be used as a descriptor for the location of 4 CUSTOM NOUN Noun Adjective Screen Se et 1 HORTH 2 SQ0UTH S EAST Adjective Screen 1 FEEPEFEE a 1 REAR 2 UPPER 3 LOWER Adjective Screen 3 Be a ee i a le ee ee ee ae 1 3RD 2 4TH 3 5TH Adjective Screen 5 SESE EEE EEE EEE EE 1 FLOOR 4 2 FLOOR 5 3 RO0M Adjective Screen 7 92 the control module currently being programmed See ee tt 1 WEST 2 FRONT 3 CENTER Adjective Screen 2 ee a 1 MAIH 2 FIRST 3 2ND Adjective Screen 4 a EEE 1 FLOOR 1 2 FLODR 2 S FLOOR 3 Adjective Screen 6 MS 9600LS Series Manual P N 52646 B2 2 12 2010 Master Programming Level Programming ANDARD AD Pressing 2 while viewing the Noun Adjective Screen wil
262. ts only connectors Pl and P2 Wiring is identical for P3 LEDs 21 30 and P4 LEDs 31 40 MS 9600LS Series Manual P N 52646 B2 2 12 2010 33 Product Description Accessories 34 Pl png LED 1 LED 2 LED 3 LED 4 LED 5 LED 6 LED 7 LED 8 SO 0 y 0 jo blu mn LED 9 LED 10 i j LED Power no connection o mt a N P2 ping _ LED 11 Cathode LED 12 LED 13 LED 14 LED 15 LED 16 LED 17 LED 18 o NY jon alu n LED 19 earl LED 20 E A LED Power o _ _ Cathode ann ioleds wmf N no connection Figure 1 10 ANN I O Board Layout ANN LED Annunciator Module The ANN LED and ANN RLED annunciator modules provide LED annunciation of general sys tem faults and input zones points when used with a compatible FACP The ANN LED module pro vides alarm red trouble yellow and supervisory yellow indication for up to ten input zones or addressable points The ANN LEDR provides alarm red indication for up to 30 input zones or addressable points Multiple ANN R LED modules may be used for full system coverage MS 9600LS Series Manual P N 52646 B2 2 12 2010 Accessories Product Description In Canada the color red must be used to indicate active alarm inputs Yellow indicates s
263. ually resetting the control panel after each device activation To enable devices which are connected to a control module for the Walktest feature press while viewing the Edit Control Screen 3 until the display reads Walktest Yes Each press of the key will cause the display to toggle between Walktest Yes and Walktest No Refer to Walktest on page 160 for additional information Zone Assignment A maximum of five zones can be programmed to each addressable control module Pressing 2 while viewing Edit Control Screen 3 displays the following screen ONE ASSIGHMENT 200 Fte Fee A g Zone Assignment Screen Note that Z represents the Zone Number s corresponding to this device The factory default for an unprogrammed device is Z00 for general alarm zone A flashing cursor will appear on the first O to the left Enter the two digit number corresponding to the zone that is to be assigned to this device The cursor moves to the next Z designation Continue entering zone assignments or the MS 9600LS Series Manual P N 52646 B2 2 12 2010 Master Programming Level Programming remaining zones can be left blank or programmed as general alarm zones Z00 When all desired changes have been made press the Enter key to store the zone assignments The display will return to the Edit Control Screen 3 EDIT CONTROL Noun Adjective E The Noun Adjective selection allows the programmer to enter specific descriptors about the con
264. uey l p je su USym 4LWXP 94 esinadns 0 saduunf s14 mo 196eyo eusajxe Buisn uaym Jabseyo leyeq a el le Y dOWV4 y aigesip 0 saduunf gr enowsy NM palleysul S 41INXp uaym ejal AlosinJedns ajnpoyy uodo J4 LXp 10 SiojoauuOD elgeue o seduunf s no u oon EX or pa 08 1dO 4W1X la l l L I 3 bs GD y Y O sar suinouio Z als Z JO Aa Ais MEIL ALY SHI am gt sar Y SOVN aunBijuos 0 uoHe Ua IO DHOVN CHOWN CHOWN 1HOVN Jedo1d ul preog AJADVN I18I5Ul 8df uojeinByuo9 nejap A1o 0e sui ter meso oes EA pled AAMOVWN Buisn l E g Sse 9 10 pan uoo gar yno sad xew sdwe o g g sse d AOS p 9 CH ZH LH OWN synoJ19 pasirladns paywi 1aMod Syno S9UeIAdy UOIEI1 ION 00 BOD y DINON JONN DON ON QONON DINON OONON pasiasedns pouinbad voIsinedns 10 09 aP SYOWS 0 wnuwixew sdue g peywi seamod palej1 OCA pz 1 MOd a qeyesey Alosiaadng jqnos wey L 308 091 0 f s8b V13 ize Jamod e SSO Japun sep vI3 pay SME NNVINOVW Sonor PUB SUONIPuo9 a1qno NY3L BuLinp uonisod ON 24 0 sayoyms eal a qno ajes 118 y e Ayanoe losialadns Jo ajqno pet el siojerpunuue Buliamod Jo ajqeying p nb uolsiAsedns wnwxew sdwe g payu 1emod pasay SQA vz L 19M0d QEH S IUON Z pue 9 y AQS JO S99IM9P jqess ppe Bum uo uopewoyul paylejep 104 nue 3690
265. ule with the newly installed standoffs on the FACP main circuit board E B4 TB6 TB7 l E O Standoff Cues cUuTTO MONITOR 4XTM C JP6 4XTM OPTBD Joa OONN J11 O O Standoff 2C Standoff J2 EERE J2 OPT DACT 96dialx2 wmf J6 J8 swi J1 Connector located on OOTI EE e Pa A back of DACT UD2 module E A BATTERY O Figure 2 12 DACT UD2 J1 Connector to FACP J2 Connector NOTE Itis important that the supplied hardware be used to secure the module in order to help protect against electrical transients MS 9600LS Series Manual P N 52646 B2 2 12 2010 53 Installation Optional Modules and Devices Mounting Screw y r CUTTO O A JP D 4XTM OPT BD Joa CENNIN J11 O Mounting Screw male female standoff o J6 J8 A KEYPAD I F TB2 o UN O HN 96dialx3 wmf iit sarterY O Figure 2 13 DACT UD2 Installation on Standoffs 8 Reinstall Keypad Display on the main circuit board by positioning the unit over the appropriate standoffs and securing with screws which were loosened in step 3 9 Remount the main circuit board assembly to the chassis using screws and standoffs in their original locations Plug in the power supply cable at J1 on the main circuit board 10 Make certain to program the control panel for DACT UD2 operation 11 Refer to the Teleph
266. ult Program Option Factory Default Master Password 00000 NAC Enable Enabled Maintenance Password 11111 NAC Silenceable Yes Detector Programming Not Installed NAC Type Bell Detector Type Smoke Photo NAC Sync Type System Sensor Detector Verification Off NAC Autosilence 0 Detector Walktest Yes NAC Coding Steady Detector PAS No NAC Zones Zone 000 only Detector Presignal No NAC Silence Inhibit 0 Detector Zone Assign 000 only Relay 1 Alarm Detector Adj Noun none Relay 2 Trouble Module Programming Not Installed Relay 3 Supervisory Module Type Monitor On Board DACT No Module Walktest Yes Annunciator Terminal Mode No not used Annunciator ACS Mode No Module Presignal No UDACT No Module Zone Assign 000 only ACS Installed No Module Adj Noun none Printer PC No Zone 0 Enable Enabled Printer Baud 9600 Zone 1 Enable Enabled Canadian Option Off Zone 2 Enable Enabled Waterflow Silenceable No Zone 3 Enable Enabled ANN BUS Enabled No a eee sense a through eee Central Station Reporting Disabled Zone 99 Enable Enabled AC Loss Delay 2 Hours Special Zones 97 98 amp 99 Disabled DACT Backup Reporting First Available Zones 0 99 Type Monitor DACT Report Style By Point Loop 1 amp 2 Style Style 4 ANN Enabled No Loop 1 amp 2 Protocol LiteSpeed ANN BUS Modules Addr 1 8 None Trouble Reminder Off ANN S
267. ummary screens will be displayed These screens allow the programmer to view all device settings at a single glance Pressing the left or right arrow keys will allow the programmer to rapidly view the devices at the previous or next address if installed If a detector such as a photoelectric detector with the selected address is not physically installed on the SLC or has a communication fault but the address is programmed in the system the follow ing screen will be displayed TROUBL SMOKECPHOTO2 SESE EEE EEE Et HNH 10617 Edit Detector Screen 1 MS 9600LS Series Manual P N 52646 B2 2 12 2010 69 Programming Master Programming Level If the selected address has been added to programming and a detector such as a photoelectric detector with the selected address is physically installed on the SEC and is communicating with the control panel the following will be displayed NORMAL SMOKE PHOTO SESE EEE EEE EEE EE HAH Y 10617 Edit Detector Screen 1 To change the programming for the displayed detector press the kevboard down arrow key to view the Edit Detector screens In the preceding example e Normal indicates that the detector with the selected address is physically installed on the SLC and communicating with the control panel enabled e lt ADJ gt lt NOUN gt represents the adjective and noun which have been programmed describing the location of the displayed device ZNNN
268. upervi sory burglary or trouble signals Green indicates the presence of power or an activated output ann ledistacked wmf Figure 1 11 ANN LEDs shown in possible stacked configuration m Specifications Max ANN BUS Voltage 24 VDC Max Current e Alarm 68 mA e Standby 28 mA e Operating Temperature 32 F to 120 F 0 C to 49 C For indoor use in a dry location only m Mounting Installation Refer to the documentation supplied with the ANN LED module for mounting information ann led wmf Figure 1 12 Exploded View of ANN LED MS 9600LS Series Manual P N 52646 B2 2 12 2010 35 Product Description Accessories m ANN LED Board Layout and Connection to FACP Figure 1 13 illustrates the ANN LED board showing locations of screw terminals for connection to the FACP and the DIP switches for selecting the ANN BUS ID number ANN BUS ID Address DIP switch O ANN LED ANN BUS and power wiring are supervised and power limited ANN BUS 9600lstoled wmf Figure 1 13 ANN LED Connection to FACP ANN RLY Annunciator Module The ANN RLY relay module provides 10 programmable Form C relays when used with a compatible FACP m Specifications e Operating Voltage 24 VDC Max Current Alarm 75 mA e Standby 15 mA e Relay Contact Ratings 2amps 30 VDC resistive 0 5 amps 30 VAC
269. ut points which are disabled do not cause an alarm or any zone activation Disabled output points are held in the off state All disabled points are treated as if they were in trouble with the exception being the status label that will be displayed is DISABL 4 12 Waterflow Circuits Operation If an alarm exists from a monitor module point that has a waterflow type code and its mapped NAC control module outputs are programmed for nonsilenceable operation the Alarm Silence key will not function 4 13 Detector Functions 156 Maintenance Alert Each addressable detector is monitored by the control panel for its maintenance status Ifa detector is near but below the allowed alarm limit a maintenance alert message will automatically be dis played signaling that the detector is in need of servicing Automatic Test Operation An automatic test of an addressable detector is performed each minute resulting in a complete SLC loop test in approximately 5 hours if the loop has the maximum number of devices installed The detector s sensing chamber and electronics are functionally tested for normal safe operation A trouble message is displayed upon failure of this test A System Reset will clear this trouble MS 9600LS Series Manual P N 52646 B2 2 12 2010 Time Functions Real Time Clock Operating Instructions Type Code Supervision The FACP monitors addressable hardware device codes at slow intervals Mismatch of any type c
270. w may appear in the upper right corner of the display indicating that addi tional screens of zone information exists Press the up or down arrow keys to view the additional zones Zones Enabled Pressing 2 for Zones Enabled while viewing Zone Setup Screen 2 will display a screen similar to the following ONES ENABLED 66 Bi 62 64 65 06 Br BE 69 16 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 15 19 26 21 Zones Enabled Screen This display will show all of the zones that are enabled in the control panel Note that an up and or down arrow may appear in the upper right corner of the display indicating that additional screens of zone information exists Press the up or down arrow keys to view the additional zones MS 9600LS Series Manual P N 52646 B2 2 12 2010 Maintenance Programming Level Programming 1 ZONE TYPES 2 Z0NES AVAILABLE 3 Z0NE MESSAGE Zone Setup Screen 3 Zones Disabled Pressing 3 for Zones Disabled while viewing Zone Setup Screen 2 will display a screen similar to the following OHES DISABLED BS Zones Disabled Screen This display will show all of the zones that are disabled in the control panel Note that an up and or down arrow may appear in the upper right corner of the display indicating that additional screens of zone information exists Press the up or down arrow keys to view the additional zones Zone Type Zone Types must be programmed only if a DACT programmed for zone reporting is installed
271. x 24 VDC nominal filtered resettable power can be drawn filtered nonresettable power can be filtered nonresettable power can be drawn from TB3 Terminals 1 and 2 drawn from TB3 Terminals 3 and 4 from TB3 Terminals 5 and 6 9600tb3 wmf 123 4 5 6 Figure 2 4 Special Application Power Outputs 24 VDC 2 3 Relays The FACP provides two programmable Form C relays and one fixed fail safe Form C trouble relay all with contacts rated for 2 0 amps 30 VDC resistive or 0 5 amps 30 VAC resistive The Alarm and Supervisory silk screen labels reflect the factory default programming for the two programmable relays Note that relay connections must be power limited Refer to Power limited wiring requirements ALARM TROUBLE SUPV Note that the relays labeled as Alarm Relay Relay 1 and Supervisory Relay RELAY ices vrs N N Relay 3 reflect the factory default TB1 TB5 DD DDD programming for these relays which are programmable The relay labeled Trouble Relay Relay 2 is fixed and cannot be changed It is a fail safe relay which will transfer on any trouble or total power failure 9600reyp wmf Relay contacts shown with power applied to panel and no active troubles alarms or supervisories Figure 2 5 Relay Terminals 2 4 Notification Appliance Circuits The control panel provides four Style Y Class B or two Style Z Class A NACs Notification Appli ance Circuits Each circuit is capable of

Fujitsu P3PC-3792-02ENZ0 Photo Scanner User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents